1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2056 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2057 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2060 \begin_layout Standard
2061 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2062 are completions available.
2067 key to accept a proposed completion.
2068 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2069 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2070 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2078 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2079 ing options for text.
2080 The special math option
2084 enables characters to be composed.
2085 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2086 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2089 , you can then input the characters
2090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2101 to a formula to get it.
2102 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2103 of the math toolbar.
2104 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2108 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2109 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2118 \begin_layout Section
2120 \begin_inset Index idx
2123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2130 \begin_inset Index idx
2133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2162 \begin_inset Index idx
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2196 \begin_layout Standard
2197 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2210 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2212 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2216 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2223 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2230 \begin_layout Standard
2234 \begin_inset space ~
2242 \begin_inset space ~
2263 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2267 \begin_layout Labeling
2268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2272 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2273 LatexCommand nomenclature
2275 description "Tabulator key"
2281 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2282 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2283 \begin_inset space ~
2287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2289 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2296 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2300 , especially section
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2307 reference "sub:Lists"
2313 If you are still confused, look in the
2318 \begin_inset Newline newline
2325 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2326 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2330 \begin_layout Labeling
2331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2335 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2336 LatexCommand nomenclature
2338 description "Escape key"
2345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2352 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2353 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2356 \begin_layout Labeling
2357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2363 \begin_inset space ~
2367 \begin_inset space ~
2374 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2375 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2379 \begin_layout Standard
2380 There are three modifier keys:
2383 \begin_layout Labeling
2384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2402 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2403 LatexCommand nomenclature
2405 description "Control key"
2409 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2410 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2414 \begin_layout Itemize
2423 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2426 \begin_layout Itemize
2435 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2438 \begin_layout Itemize
2447 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2471 LatexCommand nomenclature
2473 description "Shift key"
2477 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2478 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2481 \begin_layout Labeling
2482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Alt or Meta key"
2507 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2508 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2509 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2515 \begin_inset Newline newline
2518 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2520 menu accelerator keys
2523 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2524 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2528 \begin_layout Standard
2529 For example, the sequence
2530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset space ~
2540 \begin_inset space ~
2546 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset space ~
2579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_layout Standard
2594 manual lists all other things bound to the
2602 \begin_layout Standard
2603 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2604 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2605 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2606 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2607 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2608 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2609 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2611 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2627 followed by a capital
2634 \begin_layout Chapter
2636 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2648 \begin_layout Section
2650 \begin_inset Index idx
2653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2662 \begin_layout Subsection
2666 \begin_layout Standard
2667 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2668 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2669 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2670 numbering schemes, and so on.
2671 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2672 and format the title of your document differently.
2675 \begin_layout Standard
2680 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2681 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2682 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2683 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2684 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2687 \begin_layout Subsection
2689 \begin_inset Index idx
2692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2701 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2708 \begin_layout Standard
2709 You can select a class using the
2711 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2712 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2716 \begin_inset Index idx
2719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2726 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2734 \begin_layout Standard
2735 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2739 \begin_layout Description
2740 Article for basic articles
2743 \begin_layout Description
2744 Report for basic reports
2747 \begin_layout Description
2748 Book for writing a book
2751 \begin_layout Description
2752 Letter for US-style letters
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2756 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2757 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2758 will include many of these.
2759 Here are some of the classes.
2760 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2762 Special Document Classes
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2775 \begin_layout Description
2776 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2780 \begin_layout Description
2781 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2785 \begin_layout Description
2786 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2787 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2788 There are three article layouts available.
2789 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2790 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2791 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2792 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2797 sequential numbering
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2801 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2802 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2803 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2804 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 Beamer Layout for presentations
2811 \begin_layout Description
2812 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2813 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2817 \begin_layout Description
2818 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2821 \begin_layout Description
2823 \begin_inset space ~
2826 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 Foils Used to make transparencies
2837 \begin_layout Description
2838 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2839 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2843 \begin_layout Description
2844 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2845 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2848 \begin_layout Description
2849 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2852 \begin_layout Description
2853 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2856 \begin_layout Description
2857 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2858 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2859 (Is used by this document.)
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2866 \begin_layout Description
2867 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2870 \begin_layout Description
2875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2882 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2883 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2885 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 Slides Used to make transparencies
2892 \begin_layout Description
2894 \begin_inset space ~
2897 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2898 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2901 \begin_layout Description
2902 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2908 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2914 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2915 of the document classes.
2918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2922 \begin_layout Standard
2923 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2925 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2928 \begin_inset Index idx
2931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2948 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2949 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2951 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2954 \begin_layout Standard
2956 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2957 and some of them, like
2961 , are highly specialized.
2962 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2963 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2965 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2966 by some document class.
2967 There are just too many of them.
2968 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2971 \begin_layout Standard
2972 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2980 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2981 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2982 document class for a new file.
2983 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2988 Installing new LaTeX files
2989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2996 manual for information on how to install them.
2997 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3003 \begin_layout Standard
3004 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3005 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3007 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3008 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3009 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3011 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3015 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3021 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3033 \begin_inset Index idx
3036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3045 \begin_layout Standard
3046 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3047 chosen document class.
3048 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3049 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3056 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3070 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3074 \begin_layout Standard
3075 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3076 always installed by default.
3077 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3078 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3079 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3080 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3081 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3082 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3083 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3086 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3090 \begin_inset Index idx
3093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3094 Reconfiguration of LyX
3100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3103 Installing new LaTeX files
3104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3111 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3114 \begin_layout Standard
3115 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3123 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3124 LyX will advise you about these things.
3132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3136 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3141 \begin_inset Index idx
3144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3145 Document ! Local Layout
3153 \begin_layout Standard
3154 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3155 used in a variety of different documents.
3156 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3157 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3158 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3159 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3160 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3161 What you want is LyX's
3162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3178 manual for information on how to use it.
3181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3185 \begin_layout Standard
3186 Each class has a default set of options.
3187 Here's a quick table describing them:
3190 \begin_layout Standard
3191 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3197 \begin_layout Standard
3199 \begin_inset Tabular
3200 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3201 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 \begin_layout Standard
3661 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3667 \begin_layout Standard
3668 You're probably also wondering what
3669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3673 \begin_inset space ~
3677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3681 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3682 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3687 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3692 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3702 headings, there are also
3710 headings, and so on.
3711 We will describe these headings fully in section
3712 \begin_inset space ~
3716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3718 reference "sub:Headings"
3725 \begin_layout Subsection
3727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3729 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3734 \begin_inset Index idx
3737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3744 \begin_inset Index idx
3747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3756 \begin_layout Standard
3757 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3759 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3766 \begin_inset space ~
3774 \begin_inset space ~
3779 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3781 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3782 to use for your document.
3783 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3787 \begin_layout Standard
3791 \begin_inset space ~
3798 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3809 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3810 You can choose between the following five options:
3813 \begin_layout Labeling
3814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3819 Use default page style of current class.
3822 \begin_layout Labeling
3823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3828 No page numbers or headings.
3831 \begin_layout Labeling
3832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3840 \begin_layout Labeling
3841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3846 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3847 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3848 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3851 \begin_layout Labeling
3852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3857 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3858 have the LaTeX-package
3863 \begin_inset Index idx
3866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3873 How they are defined is explained in section
3874 \begin_inset space ~
3878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3880 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3887 \begin_layout Standard
3888 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3889 \begin_inset space ~
3893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3895 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3902 \begin_layout Subsection
3903 Paper Size and Orientation
3904 \begin_inset Index idx
3907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3908 Document ! Paper size
3914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3916 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3923 \begin_layout Standard
3924 You can find the following options in the menu
3927 \begin_inset space ~
3934 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3938 \begin_inset Index idx
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_layout Labeling
3951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 What size paper to print on.
3965 \begin_layout Itemize
3971 \begin_layout Itemize
3977 \begin_layout Itemize
3983 \begin_layout Itemize
3989 \begin_layout Itemize
3992 US letter, US legal, US executive
3995 \begin_layout Itemize
4001 \begin_layout Itemize
4008 \begin_layout Labeling
4009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4014 To choose whether to output as
4025 \begin_layout Labeling
4026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4030 \begin_inset space ~
4035 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4036 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4039 \begin_layout Subsection
4041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 \begin_layout Standard
4071 Paper margins are set in the menu
4073 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4077 \begin_inset Index idx
4080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4089 \begin_layout Standard
4090 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4091 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4092 the paper format and the font size into account.
4095 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4105 That includes the paragraph environments.
4106 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4107 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4108 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4109 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4118 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4120 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4121 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4122 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4125 \begin_layout Section
4126 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4127 \begin_inset Index idx
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4131 Paragraph ! Indentation
4139 \begin_layout Subsection
4141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4143 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4150 \begin_layout Standard
4151 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4152 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4155 \begin_layout Standard
4156 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4157 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4158 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4159 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4163 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4169 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4170 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4171 language than English.
4172 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4176 \begin_layout Standard
4177 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4178 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4180 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4181 LyX takes care of that.
4182 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4184 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4185 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4186 of a page, and so on.
4190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4191 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4196 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4197 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4201 these pre-coded spacings.
4202 We will explain more later.
4205 \begin_layout Subsection
4206 Paragraph Separation
4207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4209 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4214 \begin_inset Index idx
4217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4218 Paragraph ! Separation
4226 \begin_layout Standard
4234 \begin_inset space ~
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4249 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4253 \begin_inset Index idx
4256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4262 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4265 \begin_layout Subsection
4269 \begin_layout Standard
4270 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4273 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4275 \begin_inset space ~
4280 dialog and toggle the
4283 \begin_inset space ~
4288 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4291 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4295 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4296 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4302 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4307 \begin_inset Index idx
4310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4311 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4319 \begin_layout Standard
4322 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4326 \begin_inset Index idx
4329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4338 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4342 \begin_inset space ~
4351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4352 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4357 \begin_inset Index idx
4360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4361 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4366 installed to use this feature.
4371 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4373 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4375 \begin_inset space ~
4380 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4381 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4384 \begin_layout Section
4385 Paragraph Environments
4386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4388 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4393 \begin_inset Index idx
4396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4397 Paragraph ! Environments
4403 \begin_inset Index idx
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 Paragraph environments|(
4415 \begin_layout Subsection
4419 \begin_layout Standard
4420 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4423 \begin_layout Standard
4442 \begin_inset Newline newline
4445 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4446 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4447 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4456 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4459 \begin_layout Standard
4460 A paragraph environment is simply a
4461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4468 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4469 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4470 scheme, labels, and so on.
4471 Additionally, you can
4472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4479 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4480 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4481 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4482 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4484 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4486 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4489 \begin_layout Standard
4490 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4491 \begin_inset Graphics
4492 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4498 at the left end of the toolbar.
4499 LyX will change the environment of the
4503 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4504 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4505 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4509 \begin_layout Standard
4518 create a new paragraph using the
4522 paragraph environment.
4524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4531 because if you are in one of these environments:
4534 \begin_layout Itemize
4540 \begin_layout Itemize
4546 \begin_layout Itemize
4552 \begin_layout Itemize
4558 \begin_layout Itemize
4564 \begin_layout Itemize
4570 \begin_layout Itemize
4576 \begin_layout Standard
4577 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4581 , rather than resetting it to
4586 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4587 \begin_inset space ~
4591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4593 reference "sec:Nesting"
4600 \begin_layout Subsection
4604 \begin_layout Standard
4605 The default paragraph environment is
4610 It creates a plain paragraph.
4611 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4612 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4613 this manual) are in the
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4621 You can nest a paragraph using the
4625 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4633 \begin_layout Subsection
4635 \begin_inset Index idx
4638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4647 \begin_layout Standard
4648 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4657 for thanks or contact information.
4658 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4659 page along with today's date.
4660 For other types of documents, the title
4661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4668 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4672 \begin_layout Standard
4673 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4687 Here's how you use them:
4690 \begin_layout Itemize
4691 Put the title of your document in the
4698 \begin_layout Itemize
4699 Put the author name in the
4706 \begin_layout Itemize
4707 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4708 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4714 Note that using this environment is optional.
4715 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4716 If you don't want a date, use the option
4718 Suppress default date on front page
4722 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4725 \begin_inset space ~
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4734 You can use footnotes to insert
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4742 or contact information.
4745 \begin_layout Subsection
4747 \begin_inset Index idx
4750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4768 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4773 \begin_inset Index idx
4776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4777 Section headings ! Numbered
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4786 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4790 \begin_layout Enumerate
4796 \begin_layout Enumerate
4802 \begin_layout Enumerate
4808 \begin_layout Enumerate
4814 \begin_layout Enumerate
4820 \begin_layout Enumerate
4826 \begin_layout Enumerate
4832 \begin_layout Standard
4833 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4834 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4835 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4838 \begin_layout Standard
4839 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4840 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4841 You group the book into chapters.
4842 LyX does a similar grouping:
4845 \begin_layout Itemize
4850 is divided into either
4861 \begin_layout Itemize
4873 \begin_layout Itemize
4885 \begin_layout Itemize
4897 \begin_layout Itemize
4909 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 \begin_layout Standard
4922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4930 Not all document types use the
4934 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4939 is the top-level heading.
4947 \begin_layout Standard
4952 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4953 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4955 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4969 \begin_inset Index idx
4972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4973 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 The unnumbered section headings have a
4983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4990 at the end of their name.
4991 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4992 the table of contents, see section
4993 \begin_inset space ~
4997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5007 Changing the Numbering
5008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5010 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5017 \begin_layout Standard
5018 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5019 in the Table of Contents.
5020 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5022 Just as certain classes start with
5036 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5046 This is something you can change.
5049 \begin_layout Standard
5052 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5056 \begin_inset Index idx
5059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5068 \begin_inset space ~
5072 \begin_inset space ~
5077 you will see two counters.
5082 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5084 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5089 Short Titles of Headings
5090 \begin_inset Index idx
5093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5094 Section headings ! Short titles
5100 \begin_inset Argument 1
5103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5112 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5119 \begin_layout Standard
5120 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5121 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5122 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5123 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5126 \begin_layout Standard
5127 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5128 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5129 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5130 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5133 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5135 \begin_inset space ~
5141 This will insert a box labeled
5142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5146 \begin_inset space ~
5150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5153 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5154 This also works for captions inside floats.
5155 There can only be one short title per title.
5158 \begin_layout Standard
5159 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5166 \begin_layout Standard
5167 The following information applies to all section headings:
5170 \begin_layout Itemize
5171 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5174 \begin_layout Itemize
5175 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5178 \begin_layout Itemize
5179 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5182 \begin_layout Itemize
5183 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5186 \begin_layout Subsection
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5205 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5206 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5207 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5208 the text they contain.
5209 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5217 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5220 \begin_layout Standard
5221 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5230 when you start a new paragraph.
5231 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5235 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5236 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5237 have to change back to the
5241 environment yourself.
5244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5253 \begin_inset Index idx
5256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5265 \begin_layout Standard
5266 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5267 time for the differences.
5276 are identical except for one difference:
5280 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5289 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5292 \begin_layout Standard
5293 Here's an example of the
5306 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5308 See – no indentation!
5312 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5313 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5314 the other paragraph.
5317 \begin_layout Standard
5318 Here's another example, this time in the
5325 \begin_layout Quotation
5331 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5332 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5333 the first line, then
5337 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5341 you were quoting other text.
5344 \begin_layout Quotation
5345 Here's a new paragraph.
5346 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5347 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5350 \begin_layout Standard
5351 As the examples show,
5355 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5356 They should put quotes in the
5361 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5365 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5370 \begin_inset Index idx
5373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5380 \begin_inset Index idx
5383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5404 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5410 \begin_inset Newline newline
5413 Which I did not rehearse!
5417 It could be much worse.
5418 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5420 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5421 indented a bit more than the first.
5422 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5428 \begin_inset Newline newline
5431 And make things look fine
5432 \begin_inset Newline newline
5438 arg "newline-insert newline"
5444 \begin_layout Standard
5449 does not indent both margins.
5450 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5451 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5454 arg "newline-insert newline"
5460 \begin_layout Subsection
5462 \begin_inset Index idx
5465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5481 \begin_layout Standard
5482 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5492 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5501 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5502 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5503 describing some general features of all four of them.
5506 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5510 \begin_layout Standard
5511 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5513 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5522 reset the environment to
5526 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5527 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5528 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5536 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5543 \begin_layout Standard
5544 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5545 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5547 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5548 you read all of section
5549 \begin_inset space ~
5553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5555 reference "sec:Nesting"
5562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5564 \begin_inset Index idx
5567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5583 \begin_layout Standard
5584 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5588 paragraph environment.
5589 It has the following properties:
5592 \begin_layout Itemize
5593 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5597 \begin_layout Itemize
5598 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5601 \begin_layout Itemize
5602 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5606 \begin_layout Itemize
5607 The items can have any length.
5608 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5609 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5616 \begin_layout Itemize
5621 environment inside another
5625 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5629 \begin_layout Itemize
5630 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5633 \begin_layout Itemize
5634 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5637 \begin_layout Itemize
5639 \begin_inset space ~
5643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5645 reference "sec:Nesting"
5649 for a full explanation of nesting.
5653 \begin_layout Standard
5654 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5663 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5666 \begin_layout Standard
5667 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5668 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5671 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 The label for the first level
5676 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 The label for the second level is a dash.
5685 \begin_layout Itemize
5686 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5695 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 Back out to the third level.
5700 \begin_layout Itemize
5701 Back to the second level.
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5706 Back to the outermost level.
5709 \begin_layout Standard
5710 These are the default labels for an
5715 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5717 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5720 dialog in the submenu
5725 \begin_inset Index idx
5728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5734 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5737 \begin_layout Standard
5738 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5739 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5741 \begin_inset space ~
5745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5747 reference "sec:Nesting"
5754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5756 \begin_inset Index idx
5759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5768 name "sec:Enumerate"
5775 \begin_layout Standard
5780 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5781 It has these properties:
5784 \begin_layout Enumerate
5785 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5789 \begin_layout Enumerate
5790 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5794 \begin_layout Enumerate
5795 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5798 \begin_layout Enumerate
5803 environment resets the counter to one.
5806 \begin_layout Enumerate
5819 \begin_layout Enumerate
5820 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5821 Items can have any length.
5824 \begin_layout Enumerate
5825 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5828 \begin_layout Enumerate
5829 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5832 \begin_layout Enumerate
5833 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5837 \begin_layout Standard
5846 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5847 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5854 \begin_layout Enumerate
5855 The first level of an
5859 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5863 \begin_layout Enumerate
5864 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5877 \begin_layout Enumerate
5878 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5884 Back to the third level
5888 \begin_layout Enumerate
5889 Back to the second level.
5893 \begin_layout Enumerate
5894 Back to the outermost level.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5902 environment, see section
5903 \begin_inset space ~
5907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5909 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5914 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5917 \begin_layout Standard
5918 There is more to nesting
5922 environments than we've stated here.
5923 You should read section
5924 \begin_inset space ~
5928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5930 reference "sec:Nesting"
5934 to learn more about nesting.
5937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5939 \begin_inset Index idx
5942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5951 \begin_layout Standard
5952 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5956 list has no fixed label.
5957 Instead, LyX uses the first
5958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5965 of the first line as the label.
5969 \begin_layout Description
5970 Example: This is an example of the
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5991 it is meant that the first usage of the
5995 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5997 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6005 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6010 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6013 \begin_inset space ~
6019 \begin_inset space ~
6023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6025 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6029 for more information.) Here is an example:
6032 \begin_layout Description
6034 \begin_inset space ~
6037 Example: This one shows how to use a
6040 \begin_inset space ~
6052 \begin_layout Description
6053 Usage: You should use the
6057 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6058 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6060 It's not a good idea to use a
6064 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6065 You're better off using
6077 paragraphs into them.
6080 \begin_layout Description
6081 Nesting: You can nest
6085 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6090 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6091 them from the first line.
6094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6096 \begin_inset Index idx
6099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6108 \begin_layout Standard
6113 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6116 \begin_layout Standard
6125 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6127 Here are its properties:
6130 \begin_layout Labeling
6131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6133 \begin_inset space ~
6136 labels LyX uses the first
6137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6144 of each line as the item label.
6149 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6150 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6151 space as described above.
6154 \begin_layout Labeling
6155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6156 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6157 the body of the item text.
6158 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6159 label width plus a little extra space.
6163 \begin_layout Labeling
6164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6166 \begin_inset space ~
6169 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6171 If the label width is larger, the label
6172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6179 into the first line.
6180 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6181 margin of the rest of the item text.
6184 \begin_layout Labeling
6185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6187 \begin_inset space ~
6190 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6195 environment has the same left margin.
6196 \begin_inset Newline newline
6199 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6202 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6204 \begin_inset space ~
6209 dialog (toolbar button
6212 arg "layout-paragraph"
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6224 determines the default label width.
6225 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6234 multiple times instead.
6235 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6244 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6247 \begin_inset space ~
6252 every time you alter a label in a
6257 \begin_inset Newline newline
6260 The predefined default width is the length of
6261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6275 \begin_layout Standard
6280 list the same way as the
6284 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6290 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6294 \begin_layout Standard
6299 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6300 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6302 \begin_inset space ~
6306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6308 reference "sec:Nesting"
6312 to learn about nesting.
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 There is yet another feature of the
6320 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6322 You can use additional
6326 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6331 are documented in section
6332 \begin_inset space ~
6336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6338 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6343 Here are some examples:
6346 \begin_layout Labeling
6347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6348 Left The default for
6355 \begin_layout Labeling
6356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6357 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6364 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6367 \begin_layout Labeling
6368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6369 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6380 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6383 \begin_layout Subsection
6385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6387 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6392 \begin_inset Index idx
6395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 The features described in this section require that the module
6407 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6409 is loaded in the document settings.
6410 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6415 \begin_inset Index idx
6418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6419 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6428 Custom Enumerate Lists
6429 \begin_inset Index idx
6432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6433 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6441 \begin_layout Standard
6443 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6446 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6449 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6450 There you add the command
6453 \begin_layout Standard
6461 \begin_layout Standard
6462 in TeX Code (shortcut
6472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6473 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6480 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6493 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6500 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6501 For capital Roman numerals replace
6513 in the command above.
6514 For Arabic numerals use
6522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6529 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6544 \begin_layout Standard
6546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6554 You can only number 26
6555 \begin_inset space ~
6558 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6566 \begin_layout Standard
6567 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6568 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6575 \begin_layout Enumerate
6576 \begin_inset Argument 1
6579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6605 \begin_layout Enumerate
6606 \begin_inset Argument 1
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6632 \begin_layout Enumerate
6637 \begin_layout Enumerate
6638 \begin_inset Argument 1
6641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 \begin_layout Enumerate
6666 \begin_inset Argument 1
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 \begin_layout Standard
6696 For this list these commands were used:
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6710 \begin_inset Newline newline
6718 \begin_inset Newline newline
6726 \begin_inset Newline newline
6736 \begin_layout Standard
6743 makes the label emphasized and
6752 \begin_layout Standard
6753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6761 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6762 lists until you change the definition.
6770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6772 \begin_inset Index idx
6775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6776 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6785 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6788 \begin_layout Enumerate
6789 \begin_inset Argument 1
6792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6811 \begin_inset Note Note
6814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 goes back to default numbering
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6831 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6841 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6842 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6845 \begin_layout Standard
6846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6865 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6866 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6867 of a normal enumeration.
6868 There, insert the command
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6877 \begin_layout Standard
6882 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6886 \begin_layout Enumerate
6890 \begin_layout Enumerate
6894 \begin_layout Standard
6895 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6898 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_inset Argument 1
6902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6918 This enumeration starts at 4
6921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6923 \begin_inset Index idx
6926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Standard
6936 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6938 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6941 \begin_layout Itemize
6945 \begin_layout Itemize
6946 with standard spacing
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6950 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6952 Add there the command
6956 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6959 \begin_layout Itemize
6960 \begin_inset Argument 1
6963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6982 \begin_layout Itemize
6986 \begin_layout Itemize
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6997 \begin_inset Index idx
7000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7001 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7007 For more information see its documentation,
7008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7020 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7021 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7025 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7028 \begin_layout Enumerate
7029 \begin_inset Argument 1
7032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7053 \begin_layout Enumerate
7054 with negative indentation
7057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7058 Further Customization
7059 \begin_inset Index idx
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 Lists ! Customization
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 You can also change the style of description lists.
7076 \begin_layout Standard
7082 \begin_layout Standard
7083 changes the description label font, the command
7086 \begin_layout Standard
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7093 sets the list style.
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 An example where the command
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7105 itshape, style=nextline
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_layout Description
7114 \begin_inset space ~
7118 \begin_inset Argument 1
7121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7127 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7129 itshape, style=nextline
7139 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7140 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7144 \begin_layout Description
7146 \begin_inset space ~
7149 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7150 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7151 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7154 \begin_layout Standard
7155 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7161 \begin_inset Index idx
7164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7171 For more information see its documentation
7172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7181 \begin_layout Subsection
7183 \begin_inset Index idx
7186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7197 \begin_inset space ~
7200 Address: An Overview
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7212 \begin_inset space ~
7218 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7219 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7220 In contrast, you can use the
7227 \begin_inset space ~
7232 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7233 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7238 Of course, you're not limited to using
7245 \begin_inset space ~
7254 \begin_inset space ~
7259 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7260 some European academic papers.
7263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7267 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7274 \begin_layout Standard
7279 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7280 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7284 \begin_inset space ~
7289 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7290 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7291 Here's an example of each:
7294 \begin_layout Right Address
7296 \begin_inset Newline newline
7300 \begin_inset Newline newline
7304 \begin_inset Newline newline
7307 When is it? What is today?
7310 \begin_layout Standard
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7320 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7321 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7322 Here's an example of the
7329 \begin_layout Address
7331 \begin_inset Newline newline
7334 Where do I send this
7335 \begin_inset Newline newline
7338 Your post office and country
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 As you can see, both
7349 \begin_inset space ~
7354 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7359 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7365 This makes sense, since
7373 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7374 Thus, you have to use
7381 arg "newline-insert newline"
7386 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7393 \begin_inset space ~
7398 ) to start a new line in an
7405 \begin_inset space ~
7413 \begin_layout Subsection
7417 \begin_layout Standard
7418 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7419 or list of references.
7420 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7425 \begin_inset Index idx
7428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7437 \begin_layout Standard
7442 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7443 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7444 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7445 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7459 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7460 The book document classes ignores the
7464 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7468 in a letter document class.
7471 \begin_layout Standard
7476 environment does several things for you.
7477 First, it puts the centered label
7478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7486 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7488 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7489 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7490 the subsequent text.
7491 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7492 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7496 \begin_layout Standard
7497 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7501 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7502 The new paragraph will still be in the
7507 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7508 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 \begin_inset Float figure
7517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7519 \begin_inset Graphics
7520 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7528 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7533 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7555 We would love to demonstrate the
7559 environment, but since this document is in the
7560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7567 class, we can't do this.
7568 We inserted it therefore as figure
7569 \begin_inset space ~
7573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7575 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7580 If you have never heard of an
7581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7588 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7593 \begin_inset Index idx
7596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7605 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7612 \begin_layout Standard
7617 environment is used to list references.
7618 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7619 only use it at the end of the document.
7631 \begin_layout Standard
7632 When you first open a
7636 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7652 depending on the document class.
7653 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7654 Each paragraph of the
7658 environment is a bibliography entry.
7663 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7664 Each new paragraph is still in the
7671 \begin_layout Standard
7672 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7673 by using a BibTeX database.
7674 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7675 phy handling, have a look at section
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7682 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7689 \begin_layout Subsection
7690 Special Environments
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7694 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7695 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7702 \begin_inset Index idx
7705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7721 \begin_layout Standard
7726 environment is a LyX extension.
7727 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7732 key as a fixed whitespace.
7736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7748 \begin_inset space ~
7753 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7766 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7768 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7771 arg "newline-insert newline"
7788 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7789 So, when you finish using the
7793 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7794 Also, you can nest the
7798 environment inside of others.
7801 \begin_layout Standard
7802 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7805 \begin_layout Itemize
7809 arg "newline-insert newline"
7812 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7817 \begin_inset space \space{}
7827 arg "newline-insert newline"
7833 \begin_layout Itemize
7837 arg "newline-insert newline"
7847 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7853 \begin_layout Itemize
7854 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7855 You must put at least one
7859 in any line you want blank.
7860 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7863 \begin_layout Itemize
7864 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7868 since that will insert
7873 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7876 arg "self-insert \""
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7886 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7890 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7894 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7898 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7902 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7903 printf("Hello World!
7908 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7912 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7916 \begin_layout Standard
7917 This is just the standard
7918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 \begin_layout Standard
7934 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7936 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7937 as if you used a typewriter.
7938 \begin_inset Index idx
7941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7942 Paragraph environments|)
7947 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7950 Program Code Listings
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7984 environment is similar to the
7988 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7989 computer console text.
7994 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8007 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8008 you can have empty lines.
8020 \begin_layout Itemize
8021 have a certain language and a text style
8024 \begin_layout Itemize
8025 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8026 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8030 \begin_layout Standard
8031 Because of these properties
8035 works like a typewriter.
8039 \begin_layout Verbatim
8043 \begin_layout Verbatim
8046 The following 2 lines are empty:
8049 \begin_layout Verbatim
8053 \begin_layout Verbatim
8057 \begin_layout Verbatim
8058 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8063 \begin_layout Section
8064 Nesting Environments
8065 \begin_inset Index idx
8068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8069 Nesting ! Environments
8075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8084 \begin_layout Subsection
8088 \begin_layout Standard
8089 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8091 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8093 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8095 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8107 \begin_layout Enumerate
8111 \begin_layout Enumerate
8116 \begin_layout Enumerate
8120 \begin_layout Enumerate
8125 \begin_layout Enumerate
8129 \begin_layout Standard
8130 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8131 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8133 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8135 \begin_inset space ~
8139 \begin_inset space ~
8147 \begin_inset space ~
8151 \begin_inset space ~
8156 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8158 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8161 arg "depth-increment"
8167 arg "depth-decrement"
8181 arg "depth-increment"
8187 arg "depth-decrement"
8191 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8192 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8196 \begin_layout Standard
8197 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8198 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8199 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8200 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8203 \begin_layout Standard
8204 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8205 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8207 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8210 \begin_layout Subsection
8211 What You Can and Can't Nest
8214 \begin_layout Standard
8215 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8216 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8219 \begin_layout Standard
8220 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8221 than a simple yes or no.
8222 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8225 \begin_layout Itemize
8226 Completely unnestable
8229 \begin_layout Itemize
8230 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8234 \begin_layout Itemize
8235 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8240 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8241 environments have them:
8244 \begin_layout Description
8245 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8246 Can't nest into them.
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 \begin_layout Itemize
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8281 \begin_layout Description
8283 \begin_inset space ~
8286 Nestable You can nest them.
8287 You can nest other things into them.
8291 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 \begin_layout Itemize
8315 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8327 \begin_layout Itemize
8333 \begin_layout Itemize
8339 \begin_layout Itemize
8346 \begin_layout Description
8347 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8348 You can't nest anything into them.
8352 \begin_layout Itemize
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8376 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8424 \begin_layout Itemize
8430 \begin_layout Itemize
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8440 \begin_layout Itemize
8447 \begin_layout Standard
8448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8456 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8469 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8470 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8471 nested section headings violate this.
8479 \begin_layout Subsection
8480 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8481 \begin_inset Index idx
8484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8485 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8493 \begin_layout Standard
8494 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8495 affected by nesting anyhow.
8499 \begin_layout Itemize
8503 \begin_layout Itemize
8507 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8521 Figures and tables in
8525 are not affected by this.
8530 Have a look at section
8531 \begin_inset space ~
8535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8537 reference "sec:Floats"
8541 for more information about
8548 \begin_layout Standard
8549 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8550 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8554 \begin_layout Standard
8555 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8563 of its own, it behaves just like a
8564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8571 paragraph environment.
8572 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8576 \begin_layout Standard
8577 Here's an example with a table:
8580 \begin_layout Enumerate
8585 \begin_layout Enumerate
8586 This is (a) and it's nested.
8590 \begin_layout Standard
8591 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8597 \begin_layout Standard
8599 \begin_inset Tabular
8600 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8601 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8602 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8687 \begin_layout Standard
8688 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8695 \begin_layout Enumerate
8697 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
8705 \begin_layout Standard
8706 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8709 \begin_layout Enumerate
8714 \begin_layout Enumerate
8715 This is (a) and it's nested.
8719 \begin_layout Standard
8720 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8726 \begin_layout Standard
8728 \begin_inset Tabular
8729 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8730 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8731 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8732 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 \begin_layout Standard
8817 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8823 \begin_layout Enumerate
8830 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8833 \begin_layout Enumerate
8837 \begin_layout Standard
8838 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8842 \begin_layout Standard
8843 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8845 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8848 \begin_layout Enumerate
8853 \begin_layout Enumerate
8854 This is (a) and it's nested.
8857 \begin_layout Standard
8858 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8864 \begin_layout Standard
8866 \begin_inset Tabular
8867 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8868 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8955 \begin_layout Standard
8956 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8962 \begin_layout Enumerate
8964 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8971 \begin_layout Enumerate
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8976 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8982 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8983 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8987 \begin_layout Subsection
8988 Usage and General Features
8991 \begin_layout Standard
8992 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9001 is the innermost possible depth.
9002 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9005 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 level #1 – outermost
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9025 \begin_layout Itemize
9030 \begin_layout Itemize
9039 \begin_layout Standard
9040 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9041 both of them in the example.
9042 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9052 For example, if we tried to nest another
9057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9064 , we would get errors.
9067 \begin_layout Subsection
9069 \begin_inset Index idx
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 \begin_layout Standard
9082 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9083 We have several examples of nested environments.
9084 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9089 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9092 \begin_layout Labeling
9093 \labelwidthstring MMM
9094 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9103 \begin_layout Labeling
9104 \labelwidthstring MMM
9105 #2-a This is level #2.
9106 We created it by using
9109 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9115 arg "depth-increment"
9122 \begin_layout Labeling
9123 \labelwidthstring MMM
9124 #3-a This is level #3.
9125 This time, we just enter
9132 arg "depth-increment"
9136 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9140 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9146 arg "depth-increment"
9153 \begin_layout Standard
9158 environment, nested inside of
9159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9167 So, it's at level #4.
9168 We did this by entering
9171 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9177 arg "depth-increment"
9180 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9185 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9206 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9209 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9215 \begin_layout Labeling
9216 \labelwidthstring MMM
9217 #4-a This is level #4.
9221 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9224 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9229 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9233 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9238 keep nesting things inside
9239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9250 \begin_layout Labeling
9251 \labelwidthstring MMM
9252 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9257 \begin_layout Labeling
9258 \labelwidthstring MMM
9259 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9260 and this is level #6.
9261 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9265 \begin_layout Labeling
9266 \labelwidthstring MMM
9267 #5-b Back to level #5.
9271 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9277 arg "depth-decrement"
9284 \begin_layout Labeling
9285 \labelwidthstring MMM
9289 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9295 arg "depth-decrement"
9298 , we're back at level #4.
9302 \begin_layout Labeling
9303 \labelwidthstring MMM
9304 #3-b Back to level #3.
9305 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9309 \begin_layout Labeling
9310 \labelwidthstring MMM
9311 #2-b Back to level #2.
9316 \begin_layout Labeling
9317 \labelwidthstring MMM
9318 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9319 After this sentence, we will enter
9323 and change the paragraph environment back to
9330 \begin_layout Standard
9331 We could have also used the
9347 environment in place of the
9352 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9355 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9356 Example 2: Inheritance
9359 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9360 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9363 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9372 arg "depth-increment"
9376 \begin_inset Newline newline
9379 which, we will change to the
9387 \begin_layout Enumerate
9392 environment, at level #2.
9395 \begin_layout Enumerate
9396 Notice how the nested
9400 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9404 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9408 \begin_layout Standard
9409 We ended this example by entering
9414 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9418 and reset the nesting depth by using
9421 arg "depth-decrement"
9427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9428 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9437 \begin_inset Argument 1
9440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9441 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9449 \begin_layout Enumerate
9450 This is level #1, in an
9454 paragraph environment.
9455 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9459 \begin_layout Enumerate
9464 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9474 Now, what happens if we nest an
9478 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9479 label be? An asterisk?
9483 \begin_layout Itemize
9493 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9494 So, its label is a bullet.
9495 (We got here by using
9498 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9504 arg "depth-increment"
9507 , then changing the environment to
9515 \begin_layout Itemize
9516 Here's level #4, produced using
9519 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9525 arg "depth-increment"
9529 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9534 \begin_layout Enumerate
9535 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9537 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9542 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9546 , because we are in the
9554 environment (that is, it is an
9569 \begin_layout Enumerate
9574 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9575 type of numbering does LyX use?
9578 \begin_layout Enumerate
9579 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9585 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9588 \begin_layout Enumerate
9592 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 to decrease the depth after the next
9598 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9605 \begin_layout Enumerate
9607 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9611 \begin_layout Enumerate
9613 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9614 numeral as the label.Why?
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9618 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9627 Notice, however, that LyX
9631 reset the counter for the label.
9635 \begin_layout Enumerate
9639 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9645 arg "depth-decrement"
9648 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9649 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9650 into the twofold-nested
9658 \begin_layout Enumerate
9659 The same thing happens if we do another
9662 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9668 arg "depth-decrement"
9671 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9674 \begin_layout Standard
9675 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9680 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9694 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9700 The same rule applies for the
9704 environment, as well.
9707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9708 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9711 \begin_layout Enumerate
9712 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9713 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9714 the same detail with how we did it.
9723 \begin_layout Standard
9731 arg "depth-increment"
9738 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9739 the example in parentheses someplace.
9740 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9741 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9742 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9746 \begin_layout Enumerate
9751 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9756 Now we will add verse.
9757 \begin_inset Newline newline
9760 It will get much worse.
9761 \begin_inset Newline newline
9771 arg "depth-increment"
9782 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9783 \begin_inset Newline newline
9786 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9787 \begin_inset Newline newline
9793 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9806 \begin_layout Standard
9807 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9813 \begin_layout Standard
9815 \begin_inset Tabular
9816 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9817 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9908 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9918 arg "depth-increment"
9924 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9930 \begin_inset Newline newline
9938 arg "depth-decrement"
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 : level #1) This is another item.
9951 Note that selecting a
9955 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9956 3 times to put the table inside the
9964 \begin_layout Quotation
9965 We're now ending the
9969 list and changing to
9974 We're still at level #1.
9975 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9976 The next set of paragraphs is a
9977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9984 We will nest both the
9991 \begin_inset space ~
9996 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10000 for the letter body.
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10007 to preserve the depth.
10008 Remember that you need to use
10011 arg "newline-insert newline"
10014 to create multiple lines inside the
10021 \begin_inset space ~
10031 \begin_layout Right Address
10033 \begin_inset Newline newline
10036 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10037 \begin_inset Newline newline
10043 \begin_layout Address
10045 \begin_inset space ~
10051 \begin_layout Quotation
10052 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10056 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10057 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10058 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10059 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10060 as soon as possible.
10061 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10064 \begin_layout Quotation
10065 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10066 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10067 with your order, along with payment.
10070 \begin_layout Quotation
10071 We thank you again for your patience.
10074 \begin_layout Address
10076 \begin_inset Newline newline
10083 \begin_layout Quotation
10084 That ends that example!
10087 \begin_layout Standard
10088 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10089 just a few keystrokes.
10090 We could have easily nested an
10111 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10114 \begin_layout Subsection
10116 \begin_inset Index idx
10119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10120 Nesting ! Separation
10126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10128 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10135 \begin_layout Standard
10136 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10138 For example you need two different enumerations:
10141 \begin_layout Enumerate
10146 \begin_layout Enumerate
10151 \begin_layout Enumerate
10155 \begin_layout --Separator--
10159 \begin_layout Itemize
10165 \begin_layout --Separator--
10169 \begin_layout Enumerate
10173 \begin_layout Enumerate
10177 \begin_layout Enumerate
10181 \begin_layout Standard
10182 To tell LyX that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the
10183 end of the last item and use the menu
10185 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10186 Start New Parent Environment
10189 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10190 If you use instead the menu
10192 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10193 Start New Environment
10195 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10198 \begin_layout Standard
10199 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10203 arg "paragraph-break"
10210 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10213 \begin_layout Section
10214 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10215 \begin_inset Index idx
10218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10227 \begin_layout Standard
10228 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10229 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10230 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10231 be broken at the end of a line.
10232 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10236 \begin_layout Subsection
10238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10240 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10245 \begin_inset Index idx
10248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10257 \begin_layout Standard
10258 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10259 line at that point.
10260 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10263 \begin_layout Quote
10264 Further documentation is given in section
10265 \begin_inset Newline newline
10269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10271 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10279 \begin_layout Standard
10280 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10295 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10304 A protected space is set with
10306 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10307 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10309 \begin_inset space ~
10317 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10323 \begin_layout Subsection
10325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10327 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10332 \begin_inset Index idx
10335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10336 Spacing ! Horizontal
10344 \begin_layout Standard
10345 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10347 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10348 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10352 The length units are listed in Appendix
10353 \begin_inset space ~
10357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10359 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10370 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10375 \begin_inset Index idx
10378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10379 Spaces ! Inter-word
10387 \begin_layout Standard
10388 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10389 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10390 at the ends of sentences.
10391 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10392 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10393 followed by a period; see section
10394 \begin_inset space ~
10398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10400 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10405 To insert a normal space, select
10407 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10408 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10410 \begin_inset space ~
10418 arg "space-insert normal"
10424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10428 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10433 \begin_inset Index idx
10436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10445 \begin_layout Standard
10447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10454 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10463 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10464 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10465 inside abbreviations:
10468 \begin_layout Quote
10470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10474 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10477 \begin_layout Standard
10478 or between values and units.
10479 Compare for example this:
10480 \begin_inset Newline newline
10484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10488 \begin_inset Newline newline
10491 10 kg (normal space
10494 \begin_layout Standard
10495 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10498 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10500 \begin_inset space ~
10508 arg "space-insert thin"
10514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10518 \begin_layout Standard
10519 You can also insert the following space types:
10522 \begin_layout Description
10524 \begin_inset space ~
10528 \begin_inset space ~
10531 space A line with a
10532 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10536 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10540 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10543 negative thin space between the arrows.
10546 \begin_layout Description
10548 \begin_inset space ~
10552 \begin_inset space ~
10555 space A line with a
10556 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10560 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10564 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10567 negative medium space between the arrows.
10570 \begin_layout Description
10572 \begin_inset space ~
10576 \begin_inset space ~
10579 space A line with a
10580 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10584 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10588 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10591 negative thick space between the arrows.
10594 \begin_layout Description
10596 \begin_inset space ~
10600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10604 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10608 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10612 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10616 \begin_inset space ~
10620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10623 em) space between the arrows.
10626 \begin_layout Description
10628 \begin_inset space ~
10632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10636 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10640 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10644 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10648 \begin_inset space ~
10652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10655 em) space between the arrows.
10658 \begin_layout Description
10660 \begin_inset space ~
10664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10668 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10672 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10676 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10680 \begin_inset space ~
10684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10687 em) space between the arrows.
10690 \begin_layout Description
10692 \begin_inset space ~
10696 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10700 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10705 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10712 cm space between the arrows.
10715 \begin_layout Standard
10717 \begin_inset space ~
10721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10723 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10727 lists the different space sizes.
10730 \begin_layout Standard
10731 \begin_inset Float table
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10742 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10746 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10756 \begin_inset Tabular
10757 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10758 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10876 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11035 \begin_inset Index idx
11038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11047 \begin_layout Standard
11048 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11049 in a uniform fashion.
11050 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11051 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11052 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11053 equally between themselves.
11056 \begin_layout Standard
11057 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11060 \begin_layout Quote
11062 This is on the left side
11063 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11066 This is on the right
11069 \begin_layout Quote
11072 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11076 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11082 \begin_layout Quote
11085 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11089 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11093 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11099 \begin_layout Standard
11100 That was an example in the
11106 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11110 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11114 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11117 is one in a standard paragraph.
11118 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11122 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11125 \begin_layout Standard
11126 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11129 \begin_inset space ~
11134 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11137 \begin_layout Standard
11139 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11143 \begin_inset space ~
11149 \begin_layout Standard
11151 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11155 \begin_inset space ~
11161 \begin_layout Standard
11163 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11167 \begin_inset space ~
11173 \begin_layout Standard
11175 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11179 \begin_inset space ~
11185 \begin_layout Standard
11187 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11191 \begin_inset space ~
11197 \begin_layout Standard
11199 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11203 \begin_inset space ~
11209 \begin_layout Standard
11210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11218 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11222 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11223 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11224 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11228 option in the space dialog.
11236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11240 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11245 \begin_inset Index idx
11248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11257 \begin_layout Standard
11258 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11259 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11262 \begin_layout Standard
11263 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11266 What is correct English?:
11267 \begin_inset Newline newline
11271 \begin_inset Newline newline
11275 \begin_inset space ~
11278 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11279 \begin_inset Newline newline
11283 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11294 \begin_inset Newline newline
11298 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11315 \begin_layout Standard
11317 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11322 \begin_inset space ~
11326 \begin_inset space ~
11330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11334 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11336 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11337 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11341 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11347 \begin_inset space ~
11351 \begin_inset space ~
11355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11358 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11367 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11368 That is why it is named
11369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11377 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11378 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11382 \begin_layout Subsection
11384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11386 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11391 \begin_inset Index idx
11394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11403 \begin_layout Standard
11404 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11406 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11407 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11409 \begin_inset space ~
11415 There you find the following sizes:
11418 \begin_layout Standard
11431 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11436 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11438 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11439 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11441 \begin_inset space ~
11447 \begin_inset Index idx
11450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11451 Document ! Settings
11456 for the paragraph separation.
11457 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11468 \begin_layout Standard
11474 \begin_inset Index idx
11477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11483 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11484 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11489 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11490 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11499 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11508 s are described in section
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11515 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11524 If there are several
11528 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11529 You can therefore use
11533 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11536 \begin_layout Standard
11541 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11548 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11556 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11567 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11579 \begin_layout Subsection
11580 Paragraph Alignment
11581 \begin_inset Index idx
11584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11585 Paragraph ! Alignment
11593 \begin_layout Standard
11594 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11596 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11599 dialog (toolbar button
11602 arg "layout-paragraph"
11606 There are five possibilities:
11609 \begin_layout Itemize
11617 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11623 \begin_layout Itemize
11631 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11637 \begin_layout Itemize
11645 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11651 \begin_layout Itemize
11659 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11665 \begin_layout Itemize
11673 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11679 \begin_layout Standard
11680 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11681 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11682 the left and right margins.
11683 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11686 \begin_layout Standard
11688 This paragraph is right aligned,
11691 \begin_layout Standard
11693 this one is centered,
11696 \begin_layout Standard
11698 this one is left aligned.
11701 \begin_layout Subsection
11703 \begin_inset Index idx
11706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11707 Page breaks ! Forced
11713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11715 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11722 \begin_layout Standard
11723 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11724 can force a page break where you want one.
11725 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11726 Only if you use a lot of
11730 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11733 \begin_layout Standard
11734 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11735 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11739 have to change the page breaking.
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11743 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11745 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11747 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11748 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11750 \begin_inset space ~
11756 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11758 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11759 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11761 \begin_inset space ~
11766 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11768 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11769 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11772 \begin_layout Standard
11773 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11774 at the top of a page.
11775 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11776 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11777 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11778 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11782 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11786 to learn more about
11793 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11797 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11802 \begin_inset Index idx
11805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11806 Page breaks ! Clear
11814 \begin_layout Standard
11815 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11816 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11817 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11818 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11819 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11822 \begin_layout Standard
11823 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11825 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11826 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11828 \begin_inset space ~
11834 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11836 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11837 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11839 \begin_inset space ~
11843 \begin_inset space ~
11848 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11849 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11852 \begin_layout Subsection
11854 \begin_inset Index idx
11857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11866 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11873 \begin_layout Standard
11874 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11876 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11878 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11879 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11881 \begin_inset space ~
11885 \begin_inset space ~
11893 arg "newline-insert newline"
11897 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11899 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11900 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11902 \begin_inset space ~
11906 \begin_inset space ~
11914 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11917 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11919 This is useful to avoid
11920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11927 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11931 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11932 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11933 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11934 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11935 \begin_inset space ~
11939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11941 reference "sec:Quote"
11946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11948 reference "sec:Verse"
11953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11955 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11962 \begin_layout Subsection
11964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11966 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11971 \begin_inset Index idx
11974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11983 \begin_layout Standard
11985 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11996 \begin_layout Standard
12000 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12001 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12003 \begin_inset space ~
12008 you can insert horizontal lines.
12009 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12010 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12011 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12014 \begin_layout Standard
12016 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12027 \begin_layout Section
12028 Characters and Symbols
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12032 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12033 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12034 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12042 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12046 for information on how this is done.
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12050 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12055 dialog via the menu
12057 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12058 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12064 \begin_layout Standard
12065 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12073 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12074 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12075 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12083 \begin_layout Section
12084 Fonts and Text Styles
12085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12087 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12094 \begin_layout Subsection
12096 \begin_inset Index idx
12099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12108 \begin_layout Standard
12109 There are two types of fonts:
12112 \begin_layout Description
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12118 \begin_inset Index idx
12121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12127 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12132 characters) in the font.
12133 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12134 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12135 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12136 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12137 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12138 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12139 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12140 \begin_inset Newline newline
12143 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12144 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12145 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12146 sizes than at small ones.
12147 \begin_inset Newline newline
12161 \begin_inset space ~
12169 \begin_layout Description
12171 \begin_inset space ~
12175 \begin_inset Index idx
12178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12184 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12185 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12186 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12187 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12188 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12189 image manipulation program.
12190 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12191 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12192 \begin_inset space ~
12195 pixels high up to 34
12196 \begin_inset space ~
12199 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12200 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12201 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12203 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12204 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12205 \begin_inset Newline newline
12208 Bitmap fonts are named
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12216 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12219 \begin_layout Standard
12220 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12221 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12222 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12223 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12224 use scalable fonts.
12227 \begin_layout Standard
12228 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12231 \begin_layout Standard
12232 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12233 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12234 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12235 font to emphasize text, you use an
12236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12244 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12245 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12249 \begin_layout Subsection
12251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12253 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12260 \begin_layout Standard
12261 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12262 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12263 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12265 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12266 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12267 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12268 to a word processor.
12269 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12270 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12271 across different machines.
12272 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12273 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12275 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12277 \begin_inset space ~
12281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12283 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12288 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12289 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12292 \begin_layout Standard
12293 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12294 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12296 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12297 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12298 that is installed on your system.
12299 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12302 \begin_layout Standard
12303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12311 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12312 es; so you might have to experiment.
12320 \begin_layout Standard
12321 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12330 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12338 \begin_layout Subsection
12339 Document Font and Font size
12340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12342 name "sub:Document-Font"
12347 \begin_inset Index idx
12350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 \begin_inset Index idx
12360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12370 You can set the document fonts in the
12372 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12376 \begin_inset Index idx
12379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12380 Document ! Settings
12390 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12391 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12394 \begin_inset space ~
12403 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12405 \begin_inset space ~
12408 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12411 \begin_layout Standard
12418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12427 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12428 This requires that you use
12434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12473 as the output format, i.
12474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12478 \begin_inset space \space{}
12481 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12488 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12493 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12494 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12496 \begin_inset space ~
12499 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12500 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12501 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12503 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12506 \begin_layout Standard
12507 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12512 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12517 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12518 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12525 \begin_inset space ~
12531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12544 European Computer Modern
12547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12554 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12557 \begin_layout Standard
12566 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12567 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12572 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12575 \begin_inset space ~
12580 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12586 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12587 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12590 \begin_layout Itemize
12594 \begin_inset space ~
12599 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12612 \begin_inset space ~
12617 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12621 as the default font.
12622 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12623 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12626 \begin_inset space ~
12639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12640 One difference is improved kerning.
12648 \begin_layout Itemize
12652 \begin_inset space ~
12656 \begin_inset space ~
12661 fonts in (the rare) case that
12664 \begin_inset space ~
12669 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12684 Virtual means that it
12685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12696 -glyphs from other fonts.
12697 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12719 Loading the LaTeX-package
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12728 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12733 with the document preamble line
12734 \begin_inset Newline newline
12741 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12742 \begin_inset Newline newline
12747 will fix the guillemet problem.
12752 and that accented characters are not
12756 glyph, but built of
12760 characters, the accent and the letter.
12761 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12767 If you search for example for the French word
12768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12775 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12784 and not for the glyph
12785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12789 \begin_inset space ~
12793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12799 \begin_layout Itemize
12800 If you do not like the look of
12808 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12813 \begin_inset space ~
12819 \begin_inset space ~
12829 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12833 serif and typewriter fonts,
12837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12838 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12845 \begin_inset space ~
12854 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12859 \begin_inset space \space{}
12867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12871 \begin_inset space \space{}
12877 \begin_inset space ~
12885 \begin_inset space ~
12895 but you can also select your own.
12896 \begin_inset Newline newline
12899 The differences between roman,
12902 \begin_inset space ~
12911 fonts are explained in section
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12918 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12923 \begin_inset Newline newline
12929 \begin_inset space ~
12934 was originally designed for newspapers.
12935 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12936 into the small newspaper columns.
12940 \begin_inset space ~
12945 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12948 \begin_layout Standard
12949 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12962 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12967 depends on the class you are using.
12968 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12971 \begin_layout Standard
12972 Note that the font size is the
12977 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12978 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12979 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12982 \begin_inset space ~
12988 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12989 \begin_inset space ~
12993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12995 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13002 \begin_layout Standard
13006 \begin_inset space ~
13011 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13013 \begin_inset space ~
13016 serif or typewriter.
13021 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13031 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13052 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13058 \begin_inset Index idx
13061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13062 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13068 \begin_inset space ~
13072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13074 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13079 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13080 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13087 \begin_layout Standard
13088 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13090 Use Old Style Figures
13094 Use True Small Caps
13097 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13100 Use Old Style Figures
13102 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13104 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13112 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13116 Use True Small Caps
13118 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13119 of scaled capitals.
13120 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13121 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13124 \begin_layout Standard
13129 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13130 a font to display the script characters.
13134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13135 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13140 \begin_inset Index idx
13143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13144 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13149 So this has no effect for the document language
13163 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13167 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13175 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13179 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13180 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13181 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13183 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13186 dialog, see section
13187 \begin_inset space ~
13191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13193 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13205 \begin_layout Subsection
13209 \begin_layout Standard
13210 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13212 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13213 choose a math font in the dialog
13215 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13219 \begin_inset Index idx
13222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13223 Document ! Settings
13229 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13230 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13231 default font family
13232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13238 \begin_inset space ~
13244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13248 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13249 the document font is available.
13252 \begin_layout Standard
13253 Note that the math font will not be used for
13257 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13263 or by the insertion of the command
13270 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13271 \begin_inset space ~
13275 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13276 while the math characters do not.
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13281 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13284 \begin_inset space ~
13292 \begin_inset space ~
13297 in the document font settings.
13300 \begin_layout Standard
13301 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13302 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13318 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13338 \begin_layout Subsection
13339 Using Different Character Styles
13340 \begin_inset Index idx
13343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13350 \begin_inset Index idx
13353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13362 \begin_layout Standard
13363 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13364 certain paragraph environments.
13365 LyX supports two character styles,
13374 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13378 \begin_layout Standard
13383 style, do one of the following:
13386 \begin_layout Itemize
13387 click on the toolbar button
13396 \begin_layout Itemize
13397 use the key binding
13406 \begin_layout Standard
13407 These commands are all toggles.
13412 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13415 \begin_layout Standard
13416 One typically uses the
13420 style for proper names.
13422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13429 is the original author of LyX.
13430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13436 \begin_layout Standard
13437 A more widely used character style is the
13442 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13449 \begin_layout Itemize
13450 clicking on the toolbar button
13459 \begin_layout Itemize
13460 using the keybindings
13469 \begin_layout Standard
13474 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13475 es use a different font.
13478 \begin_layout Standard
13479 We've been using the
13483 style all over the place in this document.
13484 Here's one more example:
13487 \begin_layout Quotation
13490 Do not overuse character styles!
13493 \begin_layout Standard
13494 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13495 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13496 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13497 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13501 \begin_layout Standard
13502 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13510 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13512 \begin_inset space ~
13515 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13521 arg "dialog-show character"
13527 \begin_layout Subsection
13528 Fine-Tuning with the
13533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13535 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13540 \begin_inset Index idx
13543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13552 \begin_layout Standard
13553 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13554 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13555 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13556 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13557 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13558 from ordinary dialog.
13561 \begin_layout Standard
13562 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13563 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13564 \begin_inset Newline newline
13567 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13568 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13571 \begin_layout Standard
13572 To use custom character styles, open the
13574 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13576 \begin_inset space ~
13579 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13582 dialog or press the toolbar button
13585 arg "dialog-show character"
13589 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13590 font property that you can choose.
13591 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13594 \begin_inset space ~
13599 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13604 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13605 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13606 environments all at once.
13609 \begin_layout Standard
13610 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13625 \begin_layout Labeling
13626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13640 The possible options are:
13644 \begin_layout Labeling
13645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13650 This is the Roman font family.
13651 Normally a serif font.
13652 It's also the default family.
13662 \begin_layout Labeling
13663 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13667 \begin_inset space ~
13674 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13686 \begin_layout Labeling
13687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13694 This is the Typewriter font family.
13700 arg "font-typewriter"
13709 \begin_layout Labeling
13710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13715 This corresponds to the print weight.
13720 \begin_layout Labeling
13721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13726 This is the Medium font series.
13727 It's also the default series.
13730 \begin_layout Labeling
13731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13738 This is the Bold font series.
13751 \begin_layout Labeling
13752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13757 As the name implies.
13762 \begin_layout Labeling
13763 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13768 This is the Upright font shape.
13769 It's also the default shape.
13772 \begin_layout Labeling
13773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13787 s the Italic font shape
13793 \begin_layout Labeling
13794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13801 This is the Slanted font shape
13803 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13806 \begin_layout Labeling
13807 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13811 \begin_inset space ~
13818 This is the Small caps font shape
13825 \begin_layout Labeling
13826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13831 Alters the text color.
13832 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13836 \begin_inset space ~
13841 , which means that the document default color set in
13843 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13844 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13850 \begin_inset space ~
13855 is used, you can choose between
13888 \begin_inset Index idx
13891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13900 \begin_layout Labeling
13901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13906 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13907 the language of the document.
13908 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13910 \begin_inset Newline newline
13913 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13914 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13915 When using the spell checking (see section
13916 \begin_inset space ~
13920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13922 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13926 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13929 \begin_layout Labeling
13930 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13935 Alters the size of the font.
13936 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13937 proportional to the document font size.
13938 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13939 what you want to do.
13944 \begin_layout Labeling
13945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13966 arg "font-size tiny"
13972 \begin_layout Labeling
13973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13994 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14000 \begin_layout Labeling
14001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14022 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14028 \begin_layout Labeling
14029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14050 arg "font-size small"
14056 \begin_layout Labeling
14057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14071 It's also the default size.
14075 arg "font-size normal"
14081 \begin_layout Labeling
14082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14103 arg "font-size large"
14109 \begin_layout Labeling
14110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14131 arg "font-size larger"
14137 \begin_layout Labeling
14138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14159 arg "font-size largest"
14165 \begin_layout Labeling
14166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14187 arg "font-size huge"
14193 \begin_layout Labeling
14194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14215 arg "font-size giant"
14221 \begin_layout Labeling
14222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14227 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14247 arg "font-size increase"
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14259 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14279 arg "font-size decrease"
14286 \begin_layout Standard
14291 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14292 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14293 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14294 — use those instead.
14295 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14298 \begin_layout Labeling
14299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14304 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14309 \begin_layout Labeling
14310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14317 This is text with emphasize on
14320 This might seem like the same as
14324 , but it is actually a bit different.
14330 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14332 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14335 \begin_layout Labeling
14336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14343 This is text with Underbar on.
14349 arg "font-underline"
14355 \begin_inset Newline newline
14360 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14361 when you could not change fonts.
14362 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14363 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14367 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14370 \begin_layout Labeling
14371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14375 \begin_inset space ~
14382 This is text with Double underbar on.
14388 arg "font-underunderline"
14392 \begin_inset Newline newline
14395 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14396 about double underbar.
14399 \begin_layout Labeling
14400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14404 \begin_inset space ~
14411 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14417 arg "font-underwave"
14421 \begin_inset Newline newline
14424 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14425 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14428 \begin_layout Labeling
14429 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14436 This is text with Strikeout on.
14442 arg "font-strikeout"
14446 \begin_inset Newline newline
14449 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14450 changed in the meantime.
14453 \begin_layout Labeling
14454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14461 This is text with Noun on.
14468 , this is a logical attribute.
14469 Normally it's equivalent to
14472 \begin_inset space ~
14481 \begin_layout Standard
14482 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14483 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14485 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14487 \begin_inset space ~
14490 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14496 arg "dialog-show character"
14499 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14500 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14503 arg "textstyle-apply"
14507 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14511 \begin_layout Standard
14512 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14519 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14520 (suppose you just set the shape to
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14539 \begin_inset space ~
14551 \begin_layout Standard
14552 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14560 \begin_inset space ~
14572 \begin_layout Itemize
14578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14585 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14603 \begin_inset Newline newline
14607 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14621 \begin_inset Note Note
14624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14625 For more on phantoms see section
14626 \begin_inset space ~
14630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14632 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14642 \begin_inset Newline newline
14648 \begin_layout Itemize
14653 fonts use characters with serifs.
14654 These are the small
14655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14662 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14663 The following example shows the difference:
14664 \begin_inset Newline newline
14668 \begin_inset Newline newline
14673 text without serifs
14676 \begin_inset Newline newline
14679 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14680 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14687 \begin_layout Itemize
14692 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14693 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14694 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14697 \begin_layout Standard
14698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14705 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14706 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14709 \begin_inset space ~
14714 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14715 the property to be removed.
14716 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14717 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14718 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14736 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14737 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14745 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14749 \begin_inset space ~
14754 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14765 If you, for example, set
14766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14784 \begin_inset space ~
14789 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14798 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14801 \begin_layout Standard
14802 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14803 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14806 \begin_layout Section
14807 Printing and Previewing
14810 \begin_layout Subsection
14814 \begin_layout Standard
14815 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14816 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14817 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14818 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14819 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14821 Additional Features
14826 \begin_layout Standard
14827 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14828 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14829 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14830 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14831 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14832 This happens in two stages:
14835 \begin_layout Enumerate
14836 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14837 generating a file with the extension,
14838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14852 \begin_layout Enumerate
14853 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14857 file to produce printable output.
14860 \begin_layout Subsection
14861 Output file formats
14862 \begin_inset Index idx
14865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14874 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14882 Simple text (ASCII)
14883 \begin_inset Index idx
14886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14887 File formats ! ASCII
14895 \begin_layout Standard
14896 This file type has the extension
14897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14909 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14913 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_layout Standard
14921 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14923 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14924 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14926 \begin_inset space ~
14932 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14933 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14940 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14945 If your document includes such material, use
14947 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14948 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14950 \begin_inset space ~
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14958 \begin_inset space ~
14966 \begin_inset space ~
14970 \begin_inset space ~
14976 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14977 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14982 \begin_inset Index idx
14985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14986 File formats ! LaTeX
14994 \begin_layout Standard
14995 This file type has the extension
14996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15007 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15009 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15010 it manually with console commands.
15011 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15012 you view or export your document.
15015 \begin_layout Standard
15016 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15018 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15019 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15034 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15035 \begin_inset space ~
15039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15041 reference "sub:Export"
15048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15050 \begin_inset Index idx
15053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15062 \begin_layout Standard
15063 This file type has the extension
15064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15084 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15085 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15086 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15090 \begin_layout Standard
15091 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15092 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15093 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15094 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15095 when you view the DVI.
15096 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15099 \begin_layout Standard
15100 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15102 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15103 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15108 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15109 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15111 \begin_inset space ~
15118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15128 The latter option uses the program
15137 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15138 font access (see section
15139 \begin_inset space ~
15143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15145 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15150 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15151 standard TeX processor.
15154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15156 \begin_inset Index idx
15159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15160 File formats ! PostScript
15168 \begin_layout Standard
15169 This file type has the extension
15170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15182 PostScript was developed by the company
15186 as a printer language.
15187 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15189 PostScript can be seen as a
15190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15193 programming language
15194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15197 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15202 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15208 \begin_inset Index idx
15211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15212 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15222 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15225 \begin_layout Standard
15226 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15230 Encapsulated PostScript
15231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 (EPS, file extension
15235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15247 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15248 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15249 If, for example, you have 50
15250 \begin_inset space ~
15253 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15254 \begin_inset space ~
15257 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15258 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15259 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15260 EPS to avoid this problem.
15263 \begin_layout Standard
15264 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15266 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15267 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15275 \begin_inset Index idx
15278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15285 \begin_inset Index idx
15288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15297 \begin_layout Standard
15298 This file type has the extension
15299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15315 Portable Document Format
15316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15323 was derived from PostScript.
15324 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15333 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15334 looks exactly the same.
15337 \begin_layout Standard
15338 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15342 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15346 (JPG, file extension
15347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15374 Portable Network Graphics
15375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15378 (PNG, file extension
15379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15391 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15392 background to one of these formats.
15393 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15394 will slow down your workflow.
15395 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15398 \begin_layout Standard
15399 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15401 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15407 \begin_layout Description
15409 \begin_inset space ~
15412 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15416 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15419 \begin_layout Description
15421 \begin_inset space ~
15428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15435 X) This uses the program
15439 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15444 is a new engine, derived from
15448 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15449 access (see section
15450 \begin_inset space ~
15454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15456 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15461 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15462 standard TeX processor.
15465 \begin_layout Description
15467 \begin_inset space ~
15474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15481 X) This uses the program
15485 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15490 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15491 font access (see section
15492 \begin_inset space ~
15496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15498 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15503 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15504 vertically written Japanese.
15507 \begin_layout Description
15509 \begin_inset space ~
15512 (cropped) This is the same as
15515 \begin_inset space ~
15520 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15521 This is for example useful if you want to use LyX to generate good-looking
15522 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15525 \begin_layout Description
15527 \begin_inset space ~
15530 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15534 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15538 \begin_layout Description
15540 \begin_inset space ~
15543 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15547 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15548 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15552 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15553 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15556 \begin_layout Standard
15560 \begin_inset space ~
15569 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15570 works without problems.
15571 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15572 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15576 \begin_inset space ~
15583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15595 \begin_inset space ~
15602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15611 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15621 \begin_inset Index idx
15624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15625 FileFormats ! XHTML
15631 \begin_inset Index idx
15634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15643 \begin_layout Standard
15644 This file type has the extension
15645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15657 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15658 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15659 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15660 suitable for the purpose.
15661 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15663 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15664 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15667 between different formats, which are described in section
15669 Math Output in XHTML
15674 \begin_inset space ~
15682 \begin_layout Standard
15683 XHTML output remains
15684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15691 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15694 LyX and the World Wide Web
15698 Additional Features
15700 manual, for more information.
15703 \begin_layout Standard
15704 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15706 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15707 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15713 \begin_layout Subsection
15715 \begin_inset Index idx
15718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15727 \begin_layout Standard
15728 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15729 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15738 or use the toolbar button
15745 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15746 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15753 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15757 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15765 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15770 Further output formats can be selected via
15772 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15773 View (Other Formats)
15775 or the toolbar button
15776 \begin_inset Graphics
15777 filename ../images/view-others.png
15779 groupId toolbarbuttons
15786 \begin_layout Standard
15787 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15788 viewer window using the menu
15790 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15795 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15796 Update (Other Formats)
15801 \begin_layout Standard
15802 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15804 To have a real output, export your document.
15807 \begin_layout Subsection
15808 Printing the File from within LyX
15809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15811 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15818 \begin_layout Standard
15819 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15820 it directly from within LyX.
15821 To print a file, select the menu
15823 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15829 arg "dialog-show print"
15832 ) or click on the toolbar button
15835 arg "dialog-show print"
15839 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15840 This file is then processed by the program
15844 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15849 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15852 \begin_layout Standard
15853 You can set the following print parameters in the
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15864 \begin_layout Labeling
15865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15870 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15875 Note that this printer name is for the program
15884 has to be configured for this printer name.
15885 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15886 \begin_inset space ~
15890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15892 reference "sub:Printer"
15901 The printer should understand PostScript.
15904 \begin_layout Labeling
15905 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15910 The name of a file to print to.
15911 The output will be a PostScript file.
15912 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15916 \begin_layout Standard
15917 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15918 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15919 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15920 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15921 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15922 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15923 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15926 \begin_layout Section
15927 A few Words about Typography
15928 \begin_inset Index idx
15931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15940 \begin_layout Subsection
15941 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15942 \begin_inset Index idx
15945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15952 \begin_inset Index idx
15955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15964 \begin_layout Standard
15966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15977 character comes in four lengths: the
15989 , and the minus sign:
15990 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 \begin_inset Tabular
15998 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15999 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16000 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16001 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16002 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16003 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16032 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16072 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16097 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16099 \begin_inset space ~
16102 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16109 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16134 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16136 \begin_inset space ~
16139 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16160 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16194 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16200 \begin_layout Standard
16201 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16213 character multiple times in a row.
16214 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16215 the final output, but not in LyX.
16217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16247 \begin_layout Standard
16248 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16249 math mode and has a length of its own.
16250 Here are some examples:
16253 \begin_layout Enumerate
16254 line- and page-breaks
16255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16265 \begin_layout Enumerate
16267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16277 \begin_layout Enumerate
16278 Oh — there's a dash.
16279 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16289 \begin_layout Enumerate
16290 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16294 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16304 \begin_layout Subsection
16306 \begin_inset Index idx
16309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16318 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16325 \begin_layout Standard
16326 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16327 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16332 \begin_inset Index idx
16335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16336 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16341 following the rules of the document language.
16344 \begin_layout Standard
16345 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16350 font and with unusual constructs, like
16351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16359 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16361 This is done with the menu
16363 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16364 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16366 \begin_inset space ~
16372 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16373 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16376 \begin_layout Standard
16377 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16378 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16388 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16396 as a hyphenation possibility.
16397 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16398 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16399 as described in section
16400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16403 Prevent Hyphenation
16404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16410 \begin_inset space ~
16418 \begin_layout Subsection
16420 \begin_inset Index idx
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16432 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16433 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16436 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16443 \begin_layout Standard
16444 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16445 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16446 LaTeX then adds the
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16450 appropriate amount of space.
16451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16454 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16456 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16457 gets after another word.
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16461 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16462 not work in all cases.
16464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16476 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16479 \begin_layout Standard
16480 Here are some examples of
16484 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16487 \begin_layout Itemize
16492 \begin_layout Itemize
16497 \begin_layout Standard
16498 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16501 \begin_layout Itemize
16503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16507 this is too much space!
16510 \begin_layout Itemize
16515 \begin_layout Standard
16516 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16519 \begin_layout Standard
16520 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16523 \begin_layout Enumerate
16527 \begin_inset space ~
16532 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16539 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16548 Spaces ! inter-word
16556 \begin_layout Enumerate
16560 \begin_inset space ~
16565 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16566 \begin_inset space ~
16570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16572 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16577 \begin_inset Index idx
16580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16589 \begin_layout Enumerate
16593 \begin_inset space ~
16597 \begin_inset space ~
16601 \begin_inset space ~
16608 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16610 \begin_inset space ~
16615 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16616 This function is also bound to
16619 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16626 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16629 \begin_layout Itemize
16631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16635 \begin_inset space \space{}
16638 this is too much space!
16641 \begin_layout Itemize
16642 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16646 \begin_layout Standard
16647 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16648 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16649 will take care of this.
16652 \begin_layout Standard
16653 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16662 feature described in the section
16668 Additional Features
16673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16675 \begin_inset Index idx
16678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16679 Typography ! Quotes
16685 \begin_inset Index idx
16688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16719 \begin_layout Standard
16720 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16721 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16722 and use a closing quote at the end.
16724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16732 The keyboard character,
16736 , generates this automatically.
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16740 You can specify what character the
16744 key produces using the submenu
16750 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16754 \begin_inset Index idx
16757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16758 Document ! Settings
16768 There are six choices:
16771 \begin_layout Labeling
16772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16795 \begin_layout Labeling
16796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16799 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16803 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16809 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16813 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16819 \begin_layout Labeling
16820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16823 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16827 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16833 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16837 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16843 \begin_layout Labeling
16844 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16847 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16851 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16857 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16861 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16867 \begin_layout Labeling
16868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16871 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16875 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16881 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16885 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16891 \begin_layout Labeling
16892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16895 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16899 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16905 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16909 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16915 \begin_layout Standard
16916 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16919 arg "quote-insert single"
16925 \begin_layout Subsection
16927 \begin_inset Index idx
16930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16931 Typography ! Ligatures
16937 \begin_inset Index idx
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16971 name "sub:Ligatures"
16978 \begin_layout Standard
16979 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16980 print them as single characters.
16981 These groups are known as
16986 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16988 Here are the standard ligatures:
16991 \begin_layout Itemize
16995 \begin_layout Itemize
16999 \begin_layout Itemize
17003 \begin_layout Itemize
17007 \begin_layout Itemize
17011 \begin_layout Standard
17012 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17015 \begin_layout Standard
17016 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17017 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17025 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17041 To break a ligature, use
17043 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17044 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17046 \begin_inset space ~
17053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17064 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17089 \begin_layout Subsection
17091 \begin_inset Index idx
17094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17103 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17110 \begin_layout Standard
17111 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17112 characters in different sizes and positions.
17113 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17114 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17134 \begin_inset Note Note
17137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17138 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17139 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17144 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17145 following proper names:
17148 \begin_layout Description
17149 LyX The name of the game, write
17150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17171 \begin_layout Description
17172 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17194 \begin_layout Description
17195 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17217 \begin_layout Description
17218 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17240 \begin_layout Standard
17241 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17246 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17254 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17255 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17256 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17259 : The actual version is
17260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17267 , the previous one was
17268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17278 \begin_layout Standard
17279 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17280 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17281 In LyX this will look like
17282 \begin_inset Graphics
17283 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17289 \begin_inset Newline newline
17292 For more about TeX Code, see section
17293 \begin_inset space ~
17297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17299 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17306 \begin_layout Subsection
17308 \begin_inset Index idx
17311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17320 \begin_layout Standard
17321 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17322 space between two words.
17323 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17333 for units use the menu
17335 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17336 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17338 \begin_inset space ~
17346 arg "space-insert thin"
17352 \begin_layout Standard
17353 Here is an example to show the differences:
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17357 \begin_inset Tabular
17358 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17359 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17360 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17361 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17368 \begin_inset space ~
17372 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17384 space between number and unit
17391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17400 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17412 half space between number and unit
17425 \begin_layout Subsection
17427 \begin_inset Index idx
17430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17431 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17439 \begin_layout Standard
17440 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17442 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17443 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17444 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17445 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17446 These bits of text became known as
17457 \begin_layout Standard
17458 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17459 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17460 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17461 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17462 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17463 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17464 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17465 \begin_inset Newline newline
17473 \begin_inset Newline newline
17481 \begin_inset Newline newline
17484 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17485 Some LaTeX books (such as
17486 \begin_inset space ~
17490 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17492 key "latexcompanion"
17497 \begin_inset space ~
17501 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17507 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17511 \begin_layout Chapter
17512 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17515 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17522 \begin_layout Standard
17523 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17526 \begin_inset space ~
17532 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17535 \begin_layout Section
17537 \begin_inset Index idx
17540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17556 \begin_layout Standard
17557 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17560 \begin_layout Description
17562 \begin_inset space ~
17565 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17566 \begin_inset Newline newline
17570 \begin_inset Note Note
17573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17574 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17582 \begin_layout Description
17583 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17584 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17586 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17587 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17600 \begin_inset space ~
17606 \begin_inset Newline newline
17610 \begin_inset Note Comment
17613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17614 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17622 \begin_layout Description
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17627 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17628 set in the document settings under
17630 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17632 \begin_inset space ~
17638 \begin_inset Newline newline
17642 \begin_inset Newline newline
17646 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17655 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17656 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17661 of a comment that appears in the output.
17667 \begin_inset Newline newline
17671 \begin_inset Newline newline
17674 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17677 \begin_layout Standard
17678 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17686 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17690 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17693 \begin_layout Section
17695 \begin_inset Index idx
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17707 name "sec:Footnotes"
17714 \begin_layout Standard
17715 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17718 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17721 or the toolbar button
17724 arg "footnote-insert"
17736 \begin_inset Graphics
17737 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17746 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17775 label, the box will
17779 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17780 Clicking on the box label again will close
17793 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17794 and click on the footnote
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17810 Here is an example footnote:
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17819 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17827 \begin_layout Standard
17828 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17829 position where the footnote box is placed.
17830 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17831 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17832 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17833 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17838 ey are described in the
17841 \begin_inset space ~
17849 \begin_layout Section
17851 \begin_inset Index idx
17854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17863 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17870 \begin_layout Standard
17871 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17872 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17874 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17876 \begin_inset space ~
17881 or the toolbar button
17884 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17910 appearing within your text.
17911 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17920 \begin_layout Standard
17921 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17925 \begin_inset Marginal
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17930 This is a marginal note.
17938 \begin_layout Standard
17939 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17940 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17941 pages, right on odd pages.
17944 \begin_layout Standard
17945 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17948 \begin_inset space ~
17956 \begin_inset space ~
17964 \begin_layout Section
17965 Graphics and Images
17966 \begin_inset Index idx
17969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17976 \begin_inset Index idx
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17988 name "sec:Graphics"
17995 \begin_layout Standard
17996 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17997 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18000 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18005 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18009 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18012 \begin_layout Standard
18013 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18018 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18019 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18021 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18022 \begin_inset space ~
18026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18028 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18035 \begin_layout Standard
18040 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18041 of the image in the output.
18042 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18046 \begin_inset space ~
18050 \begin_inset space ~
18059 \begin_inset space ~
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18067 \begin_inset space ~
18072 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18073 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18081 \begin_layout Standard
18088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18096 \begin_inset space ~
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18116 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18117 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18121 \begin_inset space ~
18126 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18127 with the image size is printed.
18131 \begin_inset space ~
18135 \begin_inset space ~
18139 \begin_inset space ~
18144 is explained in the
18147 \begin_inset space ~
18159 \begin_layout Standard
18160 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18161 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18163 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18166 \begin_layout Standard
18168 \begin_inset Graphics
18169 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18177 \begin_layout Standard
18178 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18179 the image into a float, see section
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18186 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18193 \begin_layout Subsection
18195 \begin_inset Index idx
18198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18207 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18214 \begin_layout Standard
18215 You can insert images in any known file format.
18216 But as we explained in section
18217 \begin_inset space ~
18221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18223 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18227 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18228 LyX therefore uses the program
18232 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18233 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18234 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18235 \begin_inset space ~
18239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18241 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18248 \begin_layout Standard
18249 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18252 \begin_layout Description
18254 \begin_inset space ~
18257 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18258 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18259 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18263 Graphics Interchange Format
18264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18267 (GIF, file extension
18268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18280 \begin_inset Index idx
18283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18315 Portable Network Graphics
18316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18319 (PNG, file extension
18320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18332 \begin_inset Index idx
18335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18367 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18371 (JPG, file extension
18372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18396 \begin_inset Index idx
18399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18430 \begin_layout Description
18432 \begin_inset space ~
18435 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18437 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18438 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18439 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18440 \begin_inset Newline newline
18443 Scalable image formats can be
18444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18447 Scalable Vector Graphics
18448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18451 (SVG, file extension
18452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18464 \begin_inset Index idx
18467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18499 Encapsulated PostScript
18500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18503 (EPS, file extension
18504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18516 \begin_inset Index idx
18519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18551 Portable Document Format
18552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18555 (PDF, file extension
18556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18568 \begin_inset Index idx
18571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18586 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18587 result will not be scalable.
18588 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18610 \begin_layout Subsection
18611 Grouping of Image Settings
18612 \begin_inset Index idx
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 Images ! Settings grouping
18624 \begin_layout Standard
18625 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18627 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18628 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18630 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18631 need to manually change each of them.
18635 \begin_layout Standard
18636 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18639 \begin_inset space ~
18643 \begin_inset space ~
18658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18666 \begin_inset space ~
18670 \begin_inset space ~
18677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18687 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18688 and checking the name of the desired group.
18691 \begin_layout Section
18693 \begin_inset Index idx
18696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18712 \begin_layout Standard
18713 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18716 arg "tabular-insert"
18721 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18725 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18726 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18727 from the rest of the table.
18728 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18729 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18731 Here is an example table:
18734 \begin_layout Standard
18736 \begin_inset Tabular
18737 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18738 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18739 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18740 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18942 \begin_layout Subsection
18946 \begin_layout Standard
18947 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18950 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18954 This brings up the table dialog.
18955 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18956 cursor is placed currently.
18957 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18958 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18959 done on all of your selection.
18962 \begin_layout Standard
18963 In addition to the table dialog, the
18966 \begin_inset space ~
18971 helps you in setting table properties.
18972 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18975 \begin_layout Standard
18979 \begin_inset space ~
18984 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18985 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18986 current cell respectively.
18987 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18989 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18990 of text, see section
18991 \begin_inset space ~
18995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18997 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
19004 \begin_layout Standard
19005 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19006 using the check box
19015 This will merge the cells to
19019 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19020 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19021 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19022 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19023 in the last row without the upper border:
19026 \begin_layout Standard
19028 \begin_inset Tabular
19029 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19030 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19031 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19032 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19033 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19034 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19054 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19130 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 \begin_layout Standard
19166 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19167 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19168 explained in the chapter
19175 \begin_inset space ~
19181 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19182 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19185 \begin_layout Standard
19186 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19194 Most DVI-viewers are
19198 able to display rotations.
19206 \begin_layout Standard
19211 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19216 adds lines for all cell borders.
19219 \begin_layout Subsection
19221 \begin_inset Index idx
19224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19225 Tables ! Longtables
19231 \begin_inset Index idx
19234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19243 \begin_layout Standard
19244 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19247 \begin_inset space ~
19251 \begin_inset space ~
19260 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19261 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19264 \begin_layout Description
19269 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19270 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19271 except for the first page, if
19274 \begin_inset space ~
19282 \begin_layout Description
19286 \begin_inset space ~
19291 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19292 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19295 \begin_layout Description
19300 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19301 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19302 except for the last page, if
19305 \begin_inset space ~
19313 \begin_layout Description
19317 \begin_inset space ~
19322 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19323 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19326 \begin_layout Description
19327 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19328 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19330 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19334 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19345 \begin_layout Standard
19346 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19347 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19348 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19354 In this context, first means first in this order:
19357 \begin_inset space ~
19369 \begin_inset space ~
19374 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19377 \begin_layout Standard
19379 \begin_inset Tabular
19380 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19381 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19382 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19383 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19384 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19385 <row endfirsthead="true">
19386 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19397 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19406 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 <row endfirsthead="true">
19417 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19428 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 <row endhead="true">
19450 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19470 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <row endhead="true">
19481 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 <row endfoot="true">
19514 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <row endlastfoot="true">
21496 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 \begin_layout Subsection
21535 \begin_inset Index idx
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21547 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21554 \begin_layout Standard
21555 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21556 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21557 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21558 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21562 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21565 \begin_layout Standard
21566 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21567 for the column in the table dialog.
21568 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21569 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21573 \begin_layout Standard
21575 \begin_inset Tabular
21576 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21577 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21579 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21580 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 This is longer now.
21730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21782 This is longer now.
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21813 \begin_layout Standard
21814 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21815 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21820 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21821 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21827 Selection with the mouse or with
21831 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21832 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21833 the selection from outside the table.
21836 \begin_layout Section
21838 \begin_inset Index idx
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21857 \begin_layout Subsection
21861 \begin_layout Standard
21862 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21863 have a fixed location.
21865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21872 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21880 \begin_inset space ~
21885 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21886 too many notes on the current page.
21889 \begin_layout Standard
21890 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21891 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21892 and pages without text.
21893 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21894 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21895 Floats are therefore numbered.
21896 Referencing is described in section
21897 \begin_inset space ~
21901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21903 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21910 \begin_layout Standard
21911 To insert a float, use the menu
21913 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21917 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21918 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21920 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21921 \begin_inset Index idx
21924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21931 paragraph within the float.
21932 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21933 by left-clicking on the box label.
21934 A closed float box looks like this:
21935 \begin_inset Graphics
21936 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21941 – a gray button with a red label.
21944 \begin_layout Standard
21945 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21946 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21949 \begin_layout Subsection
21951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21953 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21958 \begin_inset Index idx
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 Floats ! Figure floats
21970 \begin_layout Standard
21972 \begin_inset space ~
21976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21978 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21982 was created using the menu
21984 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21985 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21991 arg "float-insert figure"
21995 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21998 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22004 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22008 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22009 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22011 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22013 \begin_inset space ~
22021 arg "layout-paragraph"
22027 \begin_layout Standard
22028 \begin_inset Float figure
22033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 \begin_inset Graphics
22036 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22051 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22055 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22068 \begin_layout Standard
22069 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22070 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22072 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22081 ) and refer to it using the menu
22083 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22089 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22093 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22094 vague references like
22095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22102 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22112 For more about cross-references, see section
22113 \begin_inset space ~
22117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22119 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22126 \begin_layout Standard
22127 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22128 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22129 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22130 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22131 as described in section
22132 \begin_inset space ~
22136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22138 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22144 \begin_inset space ~
22148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22150 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22154 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22155 You can also set the images one below the other.
22157 \begin_inset space ~
22161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22163 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22170 reference "fig:Platypus"
22174 are the subfigures.
22177 \begin_layout Standard
22178 \begin_inset Float figure
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22188 \begin_inset Float figure
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22199 name "fig:Undefinable"
22211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22212 \begin_inset Graphics
22213 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22224 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22228 \begin_inset Float figure
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22239 name "fig:Platypus"
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 \begin_inset Graphics
22253 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22265 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22277 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22281 Two distorted images.
22294 \begin_layout Subsection
22296 \begin_inset Index idx
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 Floats ! Table floats
22308 \begin_layout Standard
22309 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22311 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22312 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22315 or the toolbar button
22318 arg "float-insert table"
22322 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22323 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22324 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22326 \begin_inset space ~
22330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22332 reference "tab:Table-float"
22339 \begin_layout Standard
22340 \begin_inset Float table
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22351 name "tab:Table-float"
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 \begin_inset Tabular
22366 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22367 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22369 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22370 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22518 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22521 \end{array}\right]$
22529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22563 \begin_layout Subsection
22565 \begin_inset Index idx
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 \begin_layout Standard
22578 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22579 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22580 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22582 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22590 \begin_inset space ~
22598 \begin_layout Section
22600 \begin_inset Index idx
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 \begin_layout Standard
22613 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22615 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22616 \begin_inset space \space{}
22623 \begin_layout Standard
22624 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22626 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22630 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22631 and its alignment within the page.
22634 \begin_layout Standard
22636 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22646 height_special "totalheight"
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22652 This is a minipage.
22653 The text is set in an italic style.
22656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22660 another formatting.
22668 \begin_layout Standard
22669 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22672 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22676 as described in section
22677 \begin_inset space ~
22681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22683 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22688 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22694 \begin_layout Standard
22695 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22705 height_special "totalheight"
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22709 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22710 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22716 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22720 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22730 height_special "totalheight"
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22735 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22743 \begin_layout Standard
22744 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22750 \begin_layout Standard
22751 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22753 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22760 \begin_inset space ~
22768 \begin_layout Chapter
22769 Mathematical Formulas
22770 \begin_inset Index idx
22773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 \begin_inset Index idx
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22814 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22821 \begin_layout Standard
22822 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22827 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22830 \begin_layout Section
22832 \begin_inset Index idx
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22844 \begin_layout Standard
22845 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22858 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22860 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22861 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22862 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22864 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22870 \begin_layout Standard
22871 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22875 \begin_inset space ~
22880 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22883 \begin_layout Standard
22884 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22885 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22888 \begin_layout Standard
22889 This is a line with an inline formula
22890 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22896 \begin_layout Standard
22897 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22898 paragraph, like this one:
22899 \begin_inset Formula
22906 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22909 \begin_layout Standard
22910 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22911 For example, typing
22912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22925 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22926 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22930 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22933 \begin_inset space ~
22941 \begin_layout Subsection
22942 Navigating in Formulas
22943 \begin_inset Index idx
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 \begin_layout Standard
22956 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22957 achieved with the arrow keys.
22958 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22959 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22964 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22965 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22969 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22973 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22976 \end{array}\right]$
22984 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22989 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22990 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22998 , printed in this document as
22999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23003 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23010 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23011 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23012 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23017 For example, if you want
23018 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23026 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23036 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23040 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23045 , since in the latter case only the
23048 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23053 will be under the square root sign:
23054 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23060 \begin_layout Standard
23061 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23063 \begin_inset Formula
23065 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23074 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23075 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23078 \begin_layout Subsection
23082 \begin_layout Standard
23083 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23084 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23088 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23089 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23090 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23091 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23092 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23095 \begin_layout Subsection
23096 Exponents and Subscripts
23097 \begin_inset Index idx
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 \begin_inset Index idx
23110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 \begin_layout Standard
23120 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23123 arg "math-superscript"
23129 arg "math-subscript"
23132 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23134 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23137 , type in a formula
23140 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23150 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23156 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23160 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23166 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23172 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23181 , you have to use an extra
23185 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23186 For example, if you want
23187 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23193 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23199 Subscripts are similar: To get
23200 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23206 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23214 \begin_layout Subsection
23216 \begin_inset Index idx
23219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23228 \begin_layout Standard
23229 Create a fraction either with the command
23235 or by using the icon
23238 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23244 \begin_inset space ~
23250 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23251 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23252 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23257 To move back up, press
23262 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23263 \begin_inset Formula
23265 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23268 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23276 \begin_layout Subsection
23278 \begin_inset Index idx
23281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23290 \begin_layout Standard
23291 Roots can be created using the
23294 \begin_inset space ~
23302 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23308 arg "math-insert \\root"
23330 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23336 always produces a square root.
23339 \begin_layout Subsection
23340 Operators with Limits
23341 \begin_inset Index idx
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 \begin_inset Index idx
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23363 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23370 \begin_layout Standard
23372 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23376 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23379 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23380 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23381 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23382 The sum operator will automatically place its
23383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23390 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23392 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23396 \begin_inset Formula
23398 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23403 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23407 \begin_layout Standard
23408 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23410 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23411 behind the operator and using the menu
23413 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23414 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23416 \begin_inset space ~
23420 \begin_inset space ~
23434 \begin_layout Standard
23435 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23444 \begin_inset Index idx
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset Formula
23456 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23461 which will place the
23462 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23474 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23475 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23481 \begin_layout Standard
23482 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23489 Have a look at section
23490 \begin_inset space ~
23494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23496 reference "sub:Functions"
23500 for an explanation of function macros.
23503 \begin_layout Subsection
23505 \begin_inset Index idx
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 \begin_layout Standard
23518 Most math symbols can be found in the
23521 \begin_inset space ~
23526 under one of several categories; including
23543 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23547 \begin_layout Standard
23548 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23549 you don't have to use the
23552 \begin_inset space ~
23557 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23558 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23561 \begin_layout Subsection
23563 \begin_inset Index idx
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 \begin_layout Standard
23576 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23581 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23587 \begin_inset space ~
23595 arg "math-insert \\space"
23599 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23600 For example, the sequence
23605 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23609 \begin_inset Graphics
23610 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23615 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23616 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23617 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23618 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23620 Here are two examples:
23623 \begin_layout Standard
23633 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23639 \begin_layout Standard
23649 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23655 \begin_layout Subsection
23657 \begin_inset Index idx
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23669 name "sub:Functions"
23676 \begin_layout Standard
23680 \begin_inset space ~
23685 contains under the button
23688 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23691 a number of function macros, such as
23692 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23696 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23704 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23711 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23712 avoid confusions, because
23713 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23717 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23723 \begin_layout Standard
23724 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23726 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23730 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23736 \begin_layout Standard
23737 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23738 are placed, as described in section
23739 \begin_inset space ~
23743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23745 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23752 \begin_layout Subsection
23754 \begin_inset Index idx
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \begin_layout Standard
23767 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23769 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23770 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23771 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23774 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23775 Our example is entered by typing
23780 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23787 \begin_inset space ~
23791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23793 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23797 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23800 \begin_layout Standard
23801 \begin_inset Float table
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23812 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23816 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 \begin_inset Tabular
23827 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23828 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23829 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23830 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23831 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24413 \begin_layout Standard
24414 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24417 \begin_inset space ~
24425 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24428 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24432 \begin_layout Section
24433 Brackets and Delimiters
24434 \begin_inset Index idx
24437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 \begin_inset Index idx
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24456 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24463 \begin_layout Standard
24464 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24465 For some purposes, using just the keys
24470 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24471 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24472 toolbar delimiter icon
24475 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24479 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24480 \begin_inset Formula
24482 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24490 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24491 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24495 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24498 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24504 \begin_inset Formula
24506 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24514 \begin_layout Standard
24515 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24516 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24520 \begin_layout Standard
24521 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24522 left side and right side.
24523 If you use the option
24526 \begin_inset space ~
24531 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24532 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24533 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24538 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24541 \begin_layout Standard
24542 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24543 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24544 is to go inside the brackets.
24545 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24550 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24551 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24552 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24556 arg "math-delim ( )"
24562 \begin_layout Section
24563 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24564 \begin_inset Index idx
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24574 \begin_inset Index idx
24577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 \begin_inset Index idx
24587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24588 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24596 \begin_layout Standard
24597 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24600 \begin_inset space ~
24608 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24612 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24613 Here is an example:
24614 \begin_inset Formula
24616 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24625 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24626 \begin_inset space ~
24630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24632 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24637 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24638 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24639 This alignment is set in the box
24644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24692 for every column as default.
24693 For example, the sequence
24694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24705 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24706 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24707 corresponds to the relevant column.
24708 The result will look like this:
24709 \begin_inset Formula
24712 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24713 column & has & has\, right\\
24714 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24723 \begin_layout Standard
24724 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24727 arg "newline-insert newline"
24730 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24731 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24733 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24736 or the math toolbar.
24739 \begin_layout Standard
24740 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24741 It can be created with the menu
24743 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24744 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24746 \begin_inset space ~
24758 Here is an example:
24759 \begin_inset Formula
24773 \begin_layout Standard
24774 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24777 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24780 arg "newline-insert newline"
24784 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24789 arg "newline-insert newline"
24792 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24800 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24801 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24802 A new row is created by every further entry of
24805 arg "newline-insert newline"
24809 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24810 Here is an example:
24811 \begin_inset Formula
24813 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24814 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24819 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24820 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24821 \begin_inset Formula
24823 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24831 \begin_layout Standard
24832 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24839 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24840 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24843 reference "eq:asquared"
24848 The other types are described in section
24849 \begin_inset space ~
24853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24855 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24862 \begin_layout Section
24863 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24864 \begin_inset Index idx
24867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24868 Math ! Formula numbering
24874 \begin_inset Index idx
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24878 Math ! Referencing formulas
24884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24886 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24893 \begin_layout Standard
24894 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24896 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24897 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24899 \begin_inset space ~
24903 \begin_inset space ~
24911 arg "math-number-toggle"
24915 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24916 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24917 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24918 the document class.
24919 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24920 separated by a dot:
24921 \begin_inset Formula
24931 arg "math-number-toggle"
24934 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24935 You can only number displayed formulas.
24938 \begin_layout Standard
24939 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24941 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24942 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24944 \begin_inset space ~
24948 \begin_inset space ~
24956 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24959 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24960 \begin_inset Formula
24963 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24969 To number all lines use the shortcut
24972 arg "math-number-toggle"
24978 \begin_layout Standard
24979 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24982 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24983 A label is inserted with the menu
24985 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24994 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24995 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24996 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25008 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25009 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25010 We inserted in the following example the label
25011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25018 in the second line:
25019 \begin_inset Formula
25021 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25022 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25027 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25028 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25029 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25031 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25033 \begin_inset space ~
25041 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25045 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25046 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25047 as the formula number:
25050 \begin_layout Standard
25051 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25054 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25061 \begin_layout Standard
25062 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25063 \begin_inset space ~
25067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25069 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25074 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25082 \begin_layout Section
25083 User defined math macros
25084 \begin_inset Index idx
25087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25096 \begin_layout Standard
25097 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25098 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25099 Math macros are explained in section
25102 \begin_inset space ~
25114 \begin_layout Section
25118 \begin_layout Subsection
25120 \begin_inset Index idx
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25132 \begin_layout Standard
25133 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25134 To set a font in a formula, use the
25137 \begin_inset space ~
25145 arg "math-insert \\font"
25148 , or enter its command, listed in table
25149 \begin_inset space ~
25153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25155 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25162 \begin_layout Standard
25163 \begin_inset Float table
25168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25174 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25178 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 \begin_inset Tabular
25189 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25190 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25399 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25460 \begin_layout Standard
25461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25485 \begin_layout Standard
25486 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25487 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25492 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25493 space when you need a space in the box.
25494 Here is an example where
25495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25506 denotes the set of numbers:
25507 \begin_inset Formula
25509 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25517 \begin_layout Standard
25518 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25519 You can, for example, put a character in
25528 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25532 \begin_inset Newline newline
25535 So it is better not to use this feature.
25538 \begin_layout Standard
25539 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25540 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25544 \begin_inset Newline newline
25547 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25553 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25554 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25560 \begin_layout Standard
25567 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25570 \begin_layout Standard
25571 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25573 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25574 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25576 \begin_inset space ~
25584 \begin_layout Subsection
25586 \begin_inset Index idx
25589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25598 \begin_layout Standard
25599 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25601 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25605 \begin_inset space ~
25609 \begin_inset space ~
25617 \begin_inset space ~
25625 arg "math-insert \\font"
25629 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25630 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25631 Here is an example:
25632 \begin_inset Formula
25635 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25636 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25645 \begin_layout Subsection
25647 \begin_inset Index idx
25650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25659 \begin_layout Standard
25660 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25661 automatically chosen in most situations.
25679 For most characters,
25687 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25688 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25693 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25694 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25696 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25699 arg "math-insert \\style"
25703 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25704 For example, you can set
25705 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25708 , which is normally in
25717 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25721 The four styles are used in the following example:
25724 \begin_layout Standard
25725 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25729 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25733 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25737 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25743 \begin_layout Standard
25744 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25745 is set in a particular size with the menu
25747 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25749 \begin_inset space ~
25754 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25755 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25756 will be adjusted to correspond.
25757 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25768 \begin_layout Standard
25772 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25778 \begin_layout Section
25780 \begin_inset Index idx
25783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 \begin_inset Index idx
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25802 \begin_layout Standard
25803 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25804 (AMS) that are in common use.
25807 \begin_layout Subsection
25808 Enabling AMS-Support
25811 \begin_layout Standard
25812 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25813 the document by selecting the checkbox
25816 \begin_inset space ~
25820 \begin_inset space ~
25824 \begin_inset space ~
25831 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25835 \begin_inset Index idx
25838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25839 Document ! Settings
25847 \begin_inset space ~
25853 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25854 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25857 \begin_layout Subsection
25859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25861 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25866 \begin_inset Index idx
25869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25870 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25878 \begin_layout Standard
25879 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25880 LyX allows you to choose between
25901 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25908 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25911 \begin_layout Chapter
25915 \begin_layout Section
25917 \begin_inset Index idx
25920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25929 name "sec:Cross-References"
25936 \begin_layout Standard
25937 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25938 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25940 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25941 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25942 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25945 \begin_layout Enumerate
25949 \begin_layout Enumerate
25950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25952 name "enu:Second-item"
25959 \begin_layout Enumerate
25963 \begin_layout Standard
25964 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25966 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25969 or by pressing the toolbar button
25976 A gray label box like this:
25977 \begin_inset Graphics
25978 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25983 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25984 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26019 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26020 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26036 \begin_layout Standard
26037 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26039 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26042 or the toolbar button
26045 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26049 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26050 \begin_inset Graphics
26051 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26056 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26058 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26071 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26075 \begin_layout Standard
26076 As an alternative to
26078 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26081 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26086 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26087 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26089 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26101 \begin_layout Standard
26102 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26103 \begin_inset space ~
26107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26109 reference "enu:Second-item"
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 It is recommended to use a protected space
26121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26122 described in section
26123 \begin_inset space ~
26127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26129 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26138 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26139 line breaks between them.
26142 \begin_layout Standard
26143 There are six formats of cross-references:
26146 \begin_layout Description
26147 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26150 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26157 \begin_layout Description
26158 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26159 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26171 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26178 \begin_layout Description
26179 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26180 \begin_inset space ~
26184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26185 LatexCommand pageref
26186 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26193 \begin_layout Description
26195 \begin_inset space ~
26199 \begin_inset space ~
26202 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26204 LatexCommand vpageref
26205 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26210 \begin_inset Newline newline
26213 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26214 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26215 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26216 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26217 it prints “on the next page”.
26218 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26221 \begin_layout Description
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26227 \begin_inset space ~
26231 \begin_inset space ~
26234 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26237 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26242 \begin_inset Newline newline
26245 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26251 ; otherwise it behaves like
26255 \begin_inset space ~
26259 \begin_inset space ~
26268 \begin_layout Description
26270 \begin_inset space ~
26273 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26274 \begin_inset Newline newline
26278 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26295 \begin_inset Index idx
26298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26299 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26305 \begin_inset Index idx
26308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26309 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26320 \begin_inset Newline newline
26323 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26326 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26330 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26331 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26339 is the default and preferred because
26343 supports only English documents.
26344 The format is specified by using the command
26356 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26357 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26370 ) can be done with this command
26371 \begin_inset Newline newline
26378 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26383 \begin_inset Newline newline
26386 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26388 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26390 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26397 \begin_layout Description
26399 \begin_inset space ~
26402 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26404 LatexCommand nameref
26405 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26412 \begin_layout Standard
26413 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26414 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26415 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26419 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26423 \begin_layout Standard
26424 You can only use the style
26428 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26432 is always possible.
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26436 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26437 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26439 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26440 \begin_inset space ~
26444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26446 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26453 \begin_layout Standard
26454 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26458 \begin_inset space ~
26462 \begin_inset space ~
26467 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26468 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26471 \begin_inset space ~
26476 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26477 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26480 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26486 \begin_layout Standard
26487 You can change labels at any time.
26488 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26489 do not need to think about this.
26492 \begin_layout Standard
26493 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26494 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26495 instead of the reference.
26498 \begin_layout Standard
26499 References are described in detail in the section
26500 \begin_inset space ~
26504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26514 \begin_inset space ~
26522 \begin_layout Section
26523 Table of Contents and other Listings
26524 \begin_inset Index idx
26527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 \begin_inset Index idx
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26553 \begin_layout Subsection
26555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26557 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26567 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26568 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26570 \begin_inset space ~
26574 \begin_inset space ~
26580 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26581 If you click on it, the
26585 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26586 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26587 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26589 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26596 that is described in section
26597 \begin_inset space ~
26601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26603 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26610 \begin_layout Standard
26611 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26612 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26614 \begin_inset space ~
26618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26620 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26624 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26626 \begin_inset space ~
26630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26632 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26636 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26638 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26641 \begin_layout Subsection
26642 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26645 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26652 \begin_layout Standard
26653 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26655 You can insert them via the
26657 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26661 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26664 \begin_layout Section
26665 URLs and Hyperlinks
26666 \begin_inset Index idx
26669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 \begin_inset Index idx
26679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 \begin_layout Subsection
26690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26699 \begin_layout Standard
26700 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26702 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26708 \begin_layout Standard
26709 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26710 \begin_inset Flex URL
26713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26723 \begin_layout Standard
26724 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26730 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26734 \begin_layout Standard
26735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26751 \begin_layout Subsection
26753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26755 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26762 \begin_layout Standard
26763 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26765 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26768 or with the toolbar button
26775 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26784 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26785 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26786 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26788 name "LyX's homepage"
26789 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26793 , an Email address like this:
26794 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26796 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26797 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26802 , or a link to a file.
26805 \begin_layout Standard
26806 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26819 to the link target.
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26823 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26824 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26825 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26826 the text style dialog.
26827 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26831 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26833 name "LyX's homepage"
26834 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26841 \begin_layout Standard
26842 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26846 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26848 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26849 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26853 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26855 \begin_inset Newline newline
26863 \begin_inset Newline newline
26870 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26873 \begin_layout Section
26875 \begin_inset Index idx
26878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26887 name "sec:Appendices"
26894 \begin_layout Standard
26895 Appendices are created with the menu
26897 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26899 \begin_inset space ~
26903 \begin_inset space ~
26909 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26910 as the appendix part of the book.
26911 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26914 \begin_layout Standard
26915 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26916 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26917 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26918 and the subsection number.
26919 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26923 \begin_layout Standard
26925 \begin_inset space ~
26929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26931 reference "chap:Credits"
26936 \begin_inset space ~
26940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26942 reference "sub:Export"
26949 \begin_layout Section
26951 \begin_inset Index idx
26954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26963 name "sec:Bibliography"
26970 \begin_layout Standard
26971 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26972 You can include a bibliography database,
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26977 Known under the name
26978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26990 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26991 manually, using the paragraph environment
26995 , which was described in section
26996 \begin_inset space ~
27000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27002 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
27007 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27008 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27012 use a bibliography database.
27015 \begin_layout Subsection
27016 The Bibliography Environment
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27024 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27026 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27035 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27037 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27046 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27049 \begin_layout Standard
27050 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27052 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27055 or the toolbar button
27058 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27062 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27063 containing the available citations.
27064 Select one or more keys from the list and
27074 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27075 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27079 \begin_layout Standard
27080 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27081 entry with surrounding brackets.
27086 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27087 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27099 \begin_layout Standard
27102 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27105 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27107 key "latexcompanion"
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27115 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27116 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27125 \begin_layout Standard
27126 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27129 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27131 \begin_inset space ~
27139 arg "layout-paragraph"
27143 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27146 \begin_layout Subsection
27147 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27148 \begin_inset Index idx
27151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27152 Bibliography ! Databases
27158 \begin_inset Index idx
27161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27170 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27177 \begin_layout Standard
27178 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27184 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27186 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27187 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27192 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27194 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27195 your working field in a database.
27196 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27197 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27198 list for that document.
27199 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27203 \begin_layout Standard
27204 The database is a text file with the file extension
27205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27216 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27217 The format is explained in
27218 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27224 and in the LaTeX books (
27225 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27227 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27232 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27233 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27234 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27235 \begin_inset Flex URL
27238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27240 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27248 \begin_layout Standard
27249 To use a database, use the menu
27251 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27256 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27269 \begin_inset space ~
27275 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27276 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27283 Add bibliography to TOC
27285 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27290 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27291 in the document or just the cited references.
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27307 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27308 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27309 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27311 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27318 \begin_inset Newline newline
27322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27324 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27336 \begin_layout Standard
27337 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27342 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27348 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27349 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27354 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27355 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27356 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27371 The following variants are possible:
27374 \begin_layout Description
27375 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27376 with other bibliography packages (e.
27377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27381 \begin_inset space \space{}
27388 ), only with the package
27392 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27396 \begin_layout Description
27397 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27398 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27399 with all bibliography packages, except
27404 \begin_layout Description
27405 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27410 , works with all bibliography packages
27413 \begin_layout Standard
27414 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27416 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27422 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27431 \begin_layout Standard
27432 When you select the option
27434 Sectioned bibliography
27438 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27439 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27442 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27443 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27445 Customizing Bibliographies
27453 Additional Features
27458 \begin_layout Standard
27459 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27460 the two methods of creating them.
27461 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27462 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27463 We used the style file
27467 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27470 \begin_layout Subsection
27471 Bibliography layout
27472 \begin_inset Index idx
27475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27476 Bibliography ! Layout
27484 \begin_layout Standard
27485 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27486 For this feature you need to enable the option
27492 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27496 \begin_inset Index idx
27499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27500 Document ! Settings
27510 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27511 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27512 in the previous section.
27515 \begin_layout Standard
27516 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27517 the citation reference window.
27518 Here is an example where the text
27519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27523 \begin_inset space ~
27527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27530 appears after the reference:
27533 \begin_layout Standard
27535 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27538 key "latexcompanion"
27545 \begin_layout Section
27547 \begin_inset Index idx
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27566 \begin_layout Standard
27567 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27569 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27571 \begin_inset space ~
27576 or the toolbar button
27583 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27584 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27585 by LyX as the index entry.
27588 \begin_layout Standard
27589 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27591 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27592 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27594 \begin_inset space ~
27600 A light blue box labeled
27601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27612 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27613 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27616 \begin_layout Standard
27617 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27618 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27622 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27629 \begin_layout Subsection
27630 Grouping Index Entries
27631 \begin_inset Index idx
27634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27643 \begin_layout Standard
27644 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27646 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27647 lists under the entry
27648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 First we create the entry
27657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27671 reference "sub:Lists"
27676 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27677 \begin_inset space ~
27681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27683 reference "sec:Itemize"
27687 , we insert the command
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27696 \begin_layout Standard
27700 \begin_layout Standard
27706 \begin_layout Standard
27707 for the enumerated list in section
27708 \begin_inset space ~
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27714 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 The exclamation mark
27723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27730 marks the grouping levels.
27731 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27732 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27733 If we don't have an index entry for
27734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27741 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27744 \begin_layout Subsection
27746 \begin_inset Index idx
27749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27750 Index ! Page ranges
27758 \begin_layout Standard
27759 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27761 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27762 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27763 an index entry in section
27764 \begin_inset space ~
27768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27770 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27780 Paragraph environments|(
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 and another entry at the end of section
27785 \begin_inset space ~
27789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27791 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27798 \begin_layout Standard
27801 Paragraph environments|)
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27829 respectively start and end the index range.
27830 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27831 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27832 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27833 An example is the index entry
27834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27837 Document ! Settings
27838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27844 \begin_layout Subsection
27846 \begin_inset Index idx
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27850 Index ! Cross referencing
27858 \begin_layout Standard
27859 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27860 We referred for example in the index entry
27861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27869 \begin_inset space ~
27873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27875 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27879 ) to the index entry
27880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27887 in the same section using the entry
27890 \begin_layout Standard
27893 GIF|see{Image formats}
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27898 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27899 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27902 \begin_layout Subsection
27904 \begin_inset Index idx
27907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 Index ! Entry order
27916 \begin_layout Standard
27917 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27918 follow the rules for the index order.
27919 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27924 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27926 \begin_inset space ~
27930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27932 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27941 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27942 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27967 \begin_inset Index idx
27970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27971 Dummy entries ! maïs
27977 \begin_inset Index idx
27980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27981 Dummy entries ! maître
27987 \begin_inset Index idx
27990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27991 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27996 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27997 maïs, maison, maître.
27998 To achieve this, we use the command
28001 \begin_layout Standard
28004 previous entry@current entry
28007 \begin_layout Standard
28008 In our case we want to have
28009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28024 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28027 \begin_layout Standard
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28034 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28035 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28036 See the next subsection for an example.
28039 \begin_layout Standard
28040 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28046 \begin_layout Standard
28047 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28052 to generate the index (see sec.
28053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28059 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28068 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28076 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28080 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28081 index commands start with
28082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28094 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28099 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28102 \begin_layout Standard
28114 \begin_layout Standard
28126 \begin_layout Subsection
28128 \begin_inset Index idx
28131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28132 Index ! Entry layout
28140 \begin_layout Standard
28141 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28142 \begin_inset Index idx
28145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28148 This is an italic dummy entry
28153 You can also format the page number using the character
28154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28161 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28162 We can write for example
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28168 italic page number:|textit
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28172 to get the page number in italic.
28173 \begin_inset Index idx
28176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28177 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28182 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28200 \begin_inset space ~
28206 Have a look at section
28207 \begin_inset space ~
28211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28213 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28217 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28220 \begin_layout Standard
28221 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28229 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28233 to generate the index, see sec.
28234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28240 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28249 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28254 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28258 key "latexcompanion"
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28273 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28274 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28275 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28276 If so, put the following in the preamble
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28291 \begin_layout Standard
28295 \begin_layout Standard
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 in the index entry.
28303 \begin_inset Index idx
28306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28307 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28312 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28313 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28314 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28319 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28320 a bold font for all index entries.
28321 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28333 documentation for details,
28334 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28336 key "makeindex,xindy"
28343 \begin_layout Subsection
28345 \begin_inset Index idx
28348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28357 name "sub:Index-Program"
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 If the index generation program
28369 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28373 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28382 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28383 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28384 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28385 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28386 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28396 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28397 dialog, see section
28398 \begin_inset space ~
28402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28404 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28409 The available options are listed and explained in
28410 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28412 key "makeindex,xindy"
28417 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28421 \begin_layout Standard
28422 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28423 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28426 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28427 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28431 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28432 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28435 \begin_layout Subsection
28439 \begin_layout Standard
28440 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28441 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28449 next to the standard index.
28450 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28451 that add this feature.
28457 \begin_inset Index idx
28460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28461 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28466 package to generate multiple indexes.
28467 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28472 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28473 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28480 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28481 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28482 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28493 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28494 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28497 and select the option
28499 Use multiple Indexes
28506 already contains the standard index
28507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28515 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28516 also appear as a heading) to the
28520 input field and press the
28525 The new index now also appears in the list.
28526 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28530 \begin_layout Standard
28531 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28534 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28541 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28542 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28543 are additional features:
28546 \begin_layout Itemize
28547 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28548 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28551 \begin_layout Itemize
28552 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28553 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28561 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28562 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28563 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28564 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28567 \begin_layout Section
28568 Nomenclature/Glossary
28569 \begin_inset Index idx
28572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28579 \begin_inset Index idx
28582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28613 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28620 \begin_layout Standard
28621 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28622 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28623 called nomenclature or glossary.
28626 \begin_layout Standard
28627 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28633 \begin_inset Index idx
28636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28637 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28643 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28644 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28650 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28653 \begin_layout Standard
28654 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28655 and then use the menu
28657 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28663 \begin_inset space ~
28668 or the toolbar button
28671 arg "nomencl-insert"
28676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28687 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28690 \begin_layout Standard
28691 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28692 The first is the term or
28696 that you wish to define.
28701 of the term or symbol.
28704 \begin_layout Standard
28705 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28713 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28721 \begin_layout Subsection
28722 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28723 \begin_inset Index idx
28726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28727 Nomenclature ! Layout
28735 \begin_layout Standard
28736 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28740 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28746 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28754 \begin_inset Newline newline
28762 \begin_inset Newline newline
28768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28775 character starts/ends the formula.
28776 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28788 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28798 \begin_layout Standard
28799 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28800 \begin_inset space ~
28804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28806 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28817 \begin_inset space ~
28822 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28823 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28828 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28835 in this document is:
28836 \begin_inset Newline newline
28841 dummy entry for the character
28846 \begin_inset Newline newline
28858 \begin_inset space ~
28868 font use the command
28897 \begin_layout Standard
28898 If the characters |
28899 \begin_inset space \space{}
28903 \begin_inset space \space{}
28907 \begin_inset space \space{}
28911 \begin_inset space \space{}
28915 \begin_inset space \space{}
28918 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28919 a quote character in front of them.
28920 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28921 LatexCommand nomenclature
28922 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28923 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28930 \begin_layout Subsection
28931 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28932 \begin_inset Index idx
28935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28936 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28944 \begin_layout Standard
28945 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28946 the symbol definition.
28947 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28949 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28952 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28953 LatexCommand nomenclature
28955 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28962 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28966 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28967 LatexCommand nomenclature
28970 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28975 They will be sorted by
28976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29002 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29005 will be sorted before the
29009 since the character
29010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29017 is considered in sorting.
29020 \begin_layout Standard
29021 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29024 \begin_inset space ~
29029 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29030 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29032 For the example given, you can insert
29036 in this field for the
29037 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29044 will be located before
29045 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29051 \begin_layout Standard
29052 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29057 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29066 \begin_layout Subsection
29067 Nomenclature Options
29068 \begin_inset Index idx
29071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29072 Nomenclature ! Options
29080 \begin_layout Standard
29085 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29086 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29089 \begin_layout Description
29090 refeq Appends the phrase
29091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29106 to every nomenclature entry, where
29112 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29115 \begin_layout Description
29116 refpage Appends the phrase
29117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29132 to every nomenclature entry, where
29138 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29141 \begin_layout Description
29142 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29146 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29147 class options list in the
29149 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29153 In this document the options
29160 \begin_layout Standard
29161 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29167 \begin_layout Standard
29168 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29169 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29174 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29177 \begin_layout Description
29187 \begin_layout Description
29190 nomrefpage Like the
29197 \begin_layout Description
29200 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29209 \begin_layout Description
29213 \begin_inset space ~
29219 \begin_inset space ~
29224 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29227 \begin_layout Standard
29229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29236 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29237 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29240 \begin_layout Standard
29248 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29251 \begin_inset Newline newline
29258 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29263 \begin_inset Newline newline
29267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29282 by their translation.
29285 \begin_layout Subsection
29286 Printing the Nomenclature
29287 \begin_inset Index idx
29290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29291 Nomenclature ! Printing
29299 \begin_layout Standard
29300 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29302 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29303 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29319 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29320 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29321 You can choose between these settings:
29324 \begin_layout Description
29325 Default a space of 1
29326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29332 \begin_layout Description
29334 \begin_inset space ~
29338 \begin_inset space ~
29341 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29344 \begin_layout Description
29345 Custom custom space
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29349 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29358 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29366 For example, in order to change the name to
29370 , add the following line to the preamble:
29373 \begin_layout Standard
29381 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29384 \begin_layout Subsection
29385 Nomenclature Program
29386 \begin_inset Index idx
29389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29390 Nomenclature ! Program
29396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29398 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29406 LyX uses the program
29410 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29411 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29416 by adding options, see section
29417 \begin_inset space ~
29421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29423 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29428 The available options are listed and explained in
29429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29431 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29438 \begin_layout Section
29440 \begin_inset Index idx
29443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29450 \begin_inset Index idx
29453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29454 Document ! Branches
29460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29462 name "sec:Branches"
29469 \begin_layout Standard
29470 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29471 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29472 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29473 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29476 \begin_layout Standard
29477 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29478 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29479 To create a branch, either select the menu
29481 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29482 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29485 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29487 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29494 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29495 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29496 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29497 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29498 (see below for an example).
29499 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29500 to the name of the other) and to add
29501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29513 \begin_inset space ~
29516 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29517 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29520 \begin_layout Standard
29521 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29522 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29524 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29527 where you can choose a branch.
29528 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29532 \begin_layout Standard
29533 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29534 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29538 \begin_inset Branch Question
29541 \begin_layout Standard
29542 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29550 \begin_layout Standard
29551 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29555 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29563 \begin_layout Standard
29570 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29571 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29574 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29575 Consider for example a file
29576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29583 which has the above branches.
29585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29592 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29616 branch were inactive,
29617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29632 branch was active, likewise
29633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29648 branch was active, and
29649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29652 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29656 if both branches were active.
29657 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29660 \begin_layout Standard
29661 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29667 \begin_layout Standard
29668 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29669 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29671 For example you can define for the question branch
29675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29676 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29677 \begin_inset space ~
29681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29683 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29695 \begin_layout Standard
29705 \begin_layout Standard
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29716 and for the answer branch
29719 \begin_layout Standard
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 \begin_inset Branch Question
29743 \begin_layout Standard
29747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29775 \begin_layout Standard
29776 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29779 \begin_layout Standard
29783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 Now it is possible to use the
29816 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29823 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29826 commands to obtain conditional output.
29827 Here is an example formula where only the
29834 \begin_inset Formula
29836 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29844 \begin_layout Standard
29845 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29853 \begin_layout Standard
29854 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29860 \begin_inset space \space{}
29863 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29864 For this advanced usage, see the
29869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29872 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29879 \begin_layout Section
29881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29883 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29888 \begin_inset Index idx
29891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29900 \begin_layout Standard
29903 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29904 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29907 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29909 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29914 \begin_inset Index idx
29917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29918 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29923 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29924 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29925 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29926 part of the document.
29930 \begin_layout Standard
29931 The header information in the dialog tab
29935 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29936 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29937 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29938 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29942 \begin_inset space ~
29946 \begin_inset space ~
29951 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29952 title and author entries.
29956 \begin_inset space ~
29960 \begin_inset space ~
29964 \begin_inset space ~
29969 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29972 \begin_layout Standard
29973 You can specify in the dialog tab
29977 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29986 \begin_inset space ~
29990 \begin_inset space ~
29995 option allows long links to be split;
29998 \begin_inset space ~
30002 \begin_inset space ~
30006 \begin_inset space ~
30014 \begin_inset space ~
30019 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30027 colors the different links.
30028 The default colors are:
30031 \begin_layout Labeling
30032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30037 for hyperlinks and URLs
30040 \begin_layout Labeling
30041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30049 \begin_layout Labeling
30050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30058 \begin_layout Standard
30059 but you can change these in the field
30064 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30067 \begin_layout Standard
30070 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30078 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30079 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30080 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30083 \begin_layout Standard
30088 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30089 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30090 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30100 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30101 when opening the PDF.
30103 \begin_inset space ~
30106 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30107 \begin_inset space ~
30110 1 will only display the sections.
30113 \begin_layout Standard
30114 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30115 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30121 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30122 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30131 \begin_layout Section
30132 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30135 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30142 \begin_layout Subsection
30144 \begin_inset Index idx
30147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30156 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30163 \begin_layout Standard
30164 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30165 constructs, but not all.
30166 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30167 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30168 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30169 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30170 and their commands.
30173 \begin_layout Standard
30174 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30176 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30178 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30191 \begin_inset space ~
30196 or by the toolbar button
30209 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30217 \begin_layout Standard
30218 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30219 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30220 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30221 using the LaTeX-command
30227 , you can write the command part
30233 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30237 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30238 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30239 the following example:
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30243 \begin_inset Graphics
30244 filename clipart/ERT.png
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30256 \begin_layout Standard
30257 This is a line with a
30261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30284 \begin_layout Standard
30285 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30293 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30294 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30302 \begin_layout Subsection
30303 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30304 \begin_inset Argument 1
30307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 \begin_inset Index idx
30317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30326 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30333 \begin_layout Standard
30334 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30335 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30336 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30345 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30346 any time if you know the right commands.
30347 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30348 is the end of the day.
30349 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30350 all caption labels bold.
30351 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30353 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30357 \begin_layout Standard
30358 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30359 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30360 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30372 As result you find that the package
30377 \begin_inset Index idx
30380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30381 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30387 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30389 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30392 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30407 \begin_inset space ~
30415 \begin_layout Standard
30420 usepackage[options]{package name}
30423 \begin_layout Standard
30424 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30425 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30426 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30429 \begin_layout Standard
30430 In your case the package name is
30435 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30440 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30441 So you add the command
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30449 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30452 \begin_layout Standard
30453 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30458 For more commands provided by the
30462 package, have a look at its documentation,
30463 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30477 \begin_layout Standard
30478 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30480 For example if you use a
30484 class, you don't need the package
30488 , you can instead write
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30496 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30501 \begin_layout Standard
30502 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30503 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30504 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30511 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30515 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30516 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30518 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30519 the previous section.
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30527 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30534 \begin_layout Standard
30535 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30541 \begin_layout Standard
30545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30555 \begin_inset Note Note
30558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30559 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30567 \begin_layout Left Header
30568 \begin_inset Argument 1
30571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30591 \begin_inset Note Note
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30595 defines the header line as described below
30603 \begin_layout Center Header
30604 \begin_inset Argument 1
30607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30616 \begin_layout Right Header
30617 \begin_inset Argument 1
30620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 \begin_layout Left Footer
30642 \begin_inset Argument 1
30645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30666 \begin_layout Center Footer
30667 \begin_inset Argument 1
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30681 \begin_inset Newline newline
30685 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30691 \begin_layout Right Footer
30692 \begin_inset Argument 1
30695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 \begin_layout Section
30718 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30721 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30726 \begin_inset Index idx
30729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30730 Document ! Header/Footer line
30736 \begin_inset Index idx
30739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30749 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30753 \begin_inset space ~
30764 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30770 \begin_inset space ~
30776 As a second step add in the menu
30778 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30779 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30786 Custom Header/Footerlines
30787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30791 This module offers the following 6
30792 \begin_inset space ~
30798 \begin_layout Description
30800 \begin_inset space ~
30804 \begin_inset space ~
30808 \begin_inset space ~
30812 \begin_inset space ~
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30822 \begin_layout Description
30824 \begin_inset space ~
30828 \begin_inset space ~
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30836 \begin_inset space ~
30840 \begin_inset space ~
30846 \begin_layout Standard
30847 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30850 \begin_layout Standard
30851 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30852 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30854 \begin_inset space ~
30858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30860 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30864 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30868 \begin_inset Float figure
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 \begin_inset Tabular
30878 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30879 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30880 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30881 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30882 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30902 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30931 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30942 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30946 The normal text on the page goes here.
30947 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30949 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30950 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30955 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30964 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30993 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31022 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31040 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31045 name "fig:Page-layout"
31049 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31063 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31071 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31075 \begin_inset space ~
31080 is set to “Default”.
31081 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31090 \begin_layout Subsection
31094 \begin_layout Standard
31095 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31096 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31097 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31098 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31100 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31101 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31104 \begin_layout Standard
31105 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31108 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31121 \begin_inset space ~
31129 \begin_layout Description
31132 thepage prints the current page number
31135 \begin_layout Description
31138 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31141 \begin_layout Description
31144 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31147 \begin_layout Description
31150 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31151 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31158 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31161 because it usually goes in a left header.
31164 \begin_layout Description
31167 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31168 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31170 It is normally used in the right header.
31173 \begin_layout Subsection
31174 Default header/footer
31177 \begin_layout Standard
31178 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31179 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31180 footer has the page number.
31181 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31182 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31183 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31186 \begin_inset space ~
31194 \begin_layout Subsection
31198 \begin_layout Standard
31199 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31200 Some pages are different.
31201 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31202 a new part or chapter in your book.
31203 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31204 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31205 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31209 Header and footer decoration line
31212 \begin_layout Standard
31213 By default, you get a 0.4
31214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31217 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31218 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31230 in the following way:
31233 \begin_layout Standard
31240 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31243 \begin_layout Standard
31244 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31253 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31260 \begin_layout Standard
31261 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31262 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31263 \begin_inset space ~
31267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31277 Several header/footer lines
31280 \begin_layout Standard
31281 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31282 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31283 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31285 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31299 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31300 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31313 \begin_inset space ~
31321 \begin_layout Standard
31328 headheight}{height}
31331 \begin_layout Standard
31332 where height is a size in standard units.
31333 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31334 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31335 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31337 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31354 \begin_inset space ~
31359 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31364 \begin_inset Index idx
31367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31368 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31374 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31375 for your header/footer.
31378 \begin_layout Subsection
31382 \begin_layout Standard
31383 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31384 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31385 This example consists of the following definition:
31388 \begin_layout Description
31390 \begin_inset space ~
31399 , empty optional argument
31402 \begin_layout Description
31404 \begin_inset space ~
31407 Header empty, empty optional argument
31410 \begin_layout Description
31412 \begin_inset space ~
31421 in the optional argument
31424 \begin_layout Description
31426 \begin_inset space ~
31435 in the optional argument
31438 \begin_layout Description
31440 \begin_inset space ~
31452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31456 \begin_inset Newline newline
31460 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31467 in the optional argument
31470 \begin_layout Description
31472 \begin_inset space ~
31481 , empty optional argument
31484 \begin_layout Description
31487 headrulewidth set to 2
31488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31496 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31511 \begin_layout Standard
31512 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31518 \begin_layout Standard
31522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31526 pagestyle{headings}
31532 \begin_inset Note Note
31535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31536 switches back to page style with the default headings
31544 \begin_layout Section
31545 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31548 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31553 \begin_inset Index idx
31556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31563 \begin_inset Index idx
31566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31575 \begin_layout Standard
31576 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31577 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31578 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31581 \begin_layout Subsection
31585 \begin_layout Standard
31586 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31591 \begin_inset Index idx
31594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31595 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31600 (on some systems named simply
31605 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31613 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31614 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31622 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31623 automatically installed together with LyX.
31626 \begin_layout Subsection
31630 \begin_layout Standard
31631 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31632 LaTeX, activate the option
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31642 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31648 \begin_inset space ~
31652 \begin_inset space ~
31655 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31675 \begin_inset space ~
31680 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31683 \begin_layout Standard
31684 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31688 \begin_inset space ~
31696 \begin_inset space ~
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31705 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31718 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31719 generated by activating the option
31722 \begin_inset space ~
31728 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31736 \begin_layout Subsection
31737 Selected document parts
31740 \begin_layout Standard
31741 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31742 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31743 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31744 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31746 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31750 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31751 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31752 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31755 \begin_layout Standard
31756 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31762 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 is explained in section
31775 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31780 \begin_inset space ~
31790 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31791 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31793 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31795 Here is the result:
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31799 \begin_inset Preview
31801 \begin_layout Standard
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31810 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31816 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31826 height_special "totalheight"
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31854 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31860 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31883 Previewing works also for colors.
31884 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31902 is explained in section
31909 \begin_inset space ~
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 \begin_inset Preview
31925 \begin_layout Standard
31929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31948 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31953 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31972 \begin_layout Standard
31973 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31979 \begin_layout Standard
31980 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31981 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31982 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31984 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31985 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31986 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31987 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31991 \begin_layout Subsection
31995 \begin_layout Standard
31996 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31999 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32001 \begin_inset space ~
32006 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
32007 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32009 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
32010 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32011 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32012 the source view window.
32017 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32018 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32019 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32022 \begin_layout Section
32023 Advanced Find and Replace
32024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32026 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32031 \begin_inset Index idx
32034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32041 \begin_inset Index idx
32044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32053 \begin_layout Subsection
32057 \begin_layout Standard
32058 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32059 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32060 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32061 The key-features are:
32064 \begin_layout Itemize
32065 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32066 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32067 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32071 \begin_layout Itemize
32072 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32073 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32074 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32075 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32078 \begin_layout Itemize
32079 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32080 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32081 outside of mathematics environments
32084 \begin_layout Itemize
32085 Search may be widened to a specific
32090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32094 \begin_inset space ~
32097 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32098 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32105 \begin_layout Itemize
32106 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32107 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32112 \begin_inset space ~
32115 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32118 \begin_layout Subsection
32122 \begin_layout Standard
32123 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32125 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32138 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32141 ) or the toolbar button
32144 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32150 Advanced Find and Replace
32155 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32159 \begin_layout Standard
32164 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32168 \begin_inset space ~
32173 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32176 arg "paragraph-break"
32180 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32181 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32185 arg "paragraph-break"
32188 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32192 searches backwards.
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32199 \begin_inset space ~
32204 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32213 \begin_inset space ~
32218 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32222 Searching for mathematics
32225 \begin_layout Standard
32226 Mathematical formulas, such as
32227 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32230 or something more complex like
32231 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32234 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32239 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32240 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32241 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32242 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32253 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32254 This is done by switching to the
32258 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32263 This way, entering in the
32270 \begin_layout Itemize
32271 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32272 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32275 \begin_layout Itemize
32276 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32277 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32280 \begin_layout Itemize
32281 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32282 of it only within section headings.
32283 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32284 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32288 \begin_layout Itemize
32289 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32290 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32297 \begin_layout Standard
32298 The entries made in the
32302 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32311 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32315 button or alternatively press
32318 arg "paragraph-break"
32325 while the cursor is in the
32328 \begin_inset space ~
32336 \begin_layout Standard
32337 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32338 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32342 \begin_layout Itemize
32343 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32344 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32352 with its typewriter version
32353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32367 \begin_layout Itemize
32368 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32374 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32393 (you may want to enable the
32396 \begin_inset space ~
32404 \begin_inset space ~
32409 options and disable the
32417 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32425 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32426 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32430 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32433 , or occurrences of
32434 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32438 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32444 \begin_layout Subsection
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32449 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32454 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32456 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32458 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32467 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32473 This is done with the context menu
32475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32476 Insert Regular Expression
32478 while the cursor is in the
32483 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32484 expression matching rules
32488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32489 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32495 \begin_inset space ~
32498 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32499 to match expressions.
32504 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32505 same text in the document.
32506 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32507 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32510 \begin_layout Enumerate
32511 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32516 editor the fraction
32517 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32521 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32524 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32525 fractions with the given denominator.
32528 \begin_layout Enumerate
32529 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32541 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32546 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32547 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32548 Also, by inserting a
32549 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32552 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32553 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32556 \begin_layout Standard
32557 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32558 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32559 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32562 , and referring back to them through
32563 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32567 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32571 For example, try searching with the regexp
32572 \begin_inset Newline newline
32575 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32578 \begin_inset Newline newline
32581 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32584 \begin_layout Standard
32585 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32588 \begin_layout Standard
32589 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32597 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32598 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32599 sub-expressions is absolute.
32601 \begin_inset space ~
32605 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32608 always refers to the first occurrence of
32609 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32612 in all entered regexps.
32620 \begin_layout Section
32622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32624 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32629 \begin_inset Index idx
32632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32641 \begin_layout Standard
32642 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32645 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32652 key or the toolbar button
32655 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32658 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32659 beginning of the currently selected text.
32660 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32661 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32662 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32663 scrolled so that it is visible.
32664 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32665 n, if any could be found.
32666 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32670 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32671 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32674 \begin_layout Standard
32675 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32678 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32682 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32683 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32684 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32685 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32688 \begin_inset space ~
32696 arg "dialog-show character"
32699 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32700 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32704 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32705 \begin_inset Newline newline
32709 \begin_inset Flex URL
32712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32714 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32720 \begin_inset Newline newline
32724 \begin_inset space ~
32727 files for each language.
32728 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32729 \begin_inset space ~
32732 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32741 \begin_inset Newline newline
32744 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32745 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32746 but in most cases these are
32762 is the language code.
32765 \begin_layout Subsection
32769 \begin_layout Standard
32772 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32773 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32775 \begin_inset space ~
32778 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32781 you can set the following things:
32784 \begin_layout Description
32786 \begin_inset space ~
32789 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32790 Depending on your platform,
32804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32805 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32806 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32821 \begin_layout Description
32823 \begin_inset space ~
32826 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32827 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32830 \begin_layout Description
32832 \begin_inset space ~
32835 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32841 \begin_inset space \space{}
32845 This should normally not be needed.
32848 \begin_layout Description
32850 \begin_inset space ~
32854 \begin_inset space ~
32857 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32869 \begin_layout Description
32871 \begin_inset space ~
32874 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32875 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32876 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32877 appear in a context menu.
32878 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32882 \begin_layout Description
32884 \begin_inset space ~
32888 \begin_inset space ~
32892 \begin_inset space ~
32895 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32899 \begin_layout Section
32901 \begin_inset Index idx
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32913 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32920 \begin_layout Standard
32921 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32922 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32932 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32934 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32943 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32944 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32945 which are available for many languages.
32948 \begin_layout Standard
32949 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32953 \begin_layout Subsection
32954 Setting up the thesaurus
32957 \begin_layout Standard
32966 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32970 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32975 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32981 \begin_inset space ~
32989 For instance, the US English files are named:
32992 \begin_layout Itemize
32996 \begin_layout Itemize
33000 \begin_layout Standard
33009 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33010 and you just need to point LyX (in
33012 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33013 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33014 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33016 \begin_inset space ~
33021 ) to the path where they are installed.
33025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33026 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33027 ies, typical locations are
33033 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33037 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33041 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33044 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33050 LibreOffice-<Version>
33057 On the Mac, the default location is
33059 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33060 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33061 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33062 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33063 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33064 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33072 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33073 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33074 correct place right away.
33077 \begin_layout Standard
33078 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33079 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33083 \begin_layout Itemize
33084 \begin_inset Flex URL
33087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33089 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33097 \begin_layout Standard
33098 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33099 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33101 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33102 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33103 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33105 \begin_inset space ~
33111 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33112 and point LyX there.
33115 \begin_layout Standard
33116 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33118 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33121 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33127 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33130 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33138 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33139 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33140 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33142 \begin_inset space ~
33147 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33150 \begin_layout Subsection
33151 Using the thesaurus
33154 \begin_layout Standard
33155 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33157 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33160 or the toolbar button
33163 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33166 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33168 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33170 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33171 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33172 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33181 ), related terms (such as
33184 \begin_inset space ~
33193 ), compounds (such as
33196 \begin_inset space ~
33205 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33214 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33218 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33219 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33223 \begin_layout Standard
33224 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33225 the dictionary, such as the above
33229 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33234 \begin_inset space \space{}
33237 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33238 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33239 For example, looking up the word form
33243 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33248 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33253 \begin_inset space \space{}
33264 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33265 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33266 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33269 \begin_layout Section
33271 \begin_inset Index idx
33274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33281 \begin_inset Index idx
33284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33285 Document ! Change Tracking
33291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33293 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33300 \begin_layout Standard
33301 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33302 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33303 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33304 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33306 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33308 \begin_inset space ~
33311 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33313 \begin_inset space ~
33321 \begin_layout Standard
33322 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33336 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33337 You can change the color in
33339 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33340 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33342 \begin_inset space ~
33346 \begin_inset space ~
33351 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33357 \begin_inset Index idx
33360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33361 Color ! Change tracking
33366 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33367 the cursor is in changed text.
33368 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33371 arg "changes-merge"
33377 \begin_layout Standard
33378 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33379 \begin_inset Index idx
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33391 \begin_layout Standard
33392 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33398 \begin_layout Standard
33399 \begin_inset Graphics
33400 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33408 \begin_layout Standard
33409 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33415 \begin_layout Standard
33416 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33419 \begin_layout Standard
33420 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33426 \begin_layout Standard
33427 \begin_inset Tabular
33428 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33429 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33430 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33431 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 arg "changes-track"
33449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33455 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33457 \begin_inset space ~
33460 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33480 arg "changes-output"
33488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33494 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33496 \begin_inset space ~
33499 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33501 \begin_inset space ~
33505 \begin_inset space ~
33509 \begin_inset space ~
33518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33539 Jumps to the next change
33545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 arg "change-accept"
33562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33568 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33570 \begin_inset space ~
33573 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33575 \begin_inset space ~
33584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 arg "change-reject"
33601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33607 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33609 \begin_inset space ~
33612 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 arg "changes-merge"
33640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33646 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33651 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33653 \begin_inset space ~
33662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33671 arg "all-changes-accept"
33679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33685 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33687 \begin_inset space ~
33690 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33692 \begin_inset space ~
33696 \begin_inset space ~
33705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33714 arg "all-changes-reject"
33722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33728 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33730 \begin_inset space ~
33733 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33735 \begin_inset space ~
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33771 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33772 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33785 \begin_inset space ~
33794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33817 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33819 \begin_inset space ~
33835 \begin_layout Standard
33836 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33842 \begin_layout Standard
33843 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33863 \begin_layout Standard
33864 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33865 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33866 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33867 the next change after the current cursor position.
33868 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33869 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33870 step to the next change.
33871 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33874 \begin_layout Standard
33875 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33876 to describe a change.
33879 \begin_layout Standard
33880 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33885 \begin_inset Index idx
33888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33889 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33895 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33896 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33902 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33905 \begin_layout Section
33906 Comparison of Documents
33907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33909 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33914 \begin_inset Index idx
33917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33918 Comparison of documents
33926 \begin_layout Standard
33927 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33929 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33933 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33935 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33936 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33940 \begin_inset space ~
33944 \begin_inset space ~
33948 \begin_inset space ~
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33965 \begin_inset space ~
33969 \begin_inset space ~
33973 \begin_inset space ~
33977 \begin_inset space ~
33982 enables the change tracking option
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33993 \begin_inset space ~
33998 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34001 \begin_layout Section
34002 International Support
34003 \begin_inset Index idx
34006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34007 International support
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34017 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34018 up LyX to use them:
34019 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34021 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34029 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34030 \begin_inset space ~
34034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34036 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34043 \begin_layout Subsection
34045 \begin_inset Index idx
34048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34055 \begin_inset Index idx
34058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34059 Document ! Settings
34065 \begin_inset Index idx
34068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34069 Document ! Language
34077 \begin_layout Standard
34080 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34081 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34084 dialog lets you set
34086 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34091 \begin_layout Standard
34096 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34100 \begin_inset space ~
34105 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34106 For details about the different encoding options see section
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34113 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34120 \begin_layout Subsection
34121 Keyboard mapping configuration
34122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34124 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34131 \begin_layout Standard
34132 If you have for example a U.
34133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34136 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34137 can use an alternate keymap.
34138 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34139 use an Italian keymap.
34142 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34143 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34144 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34147 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34154 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34159 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34160 which one you want to use.
34163 \begin_layout Standard
34164 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34165 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34166 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34170 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34171 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34172 one to support the characters you want.
34173 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34180 \begin_layout Chapter
34183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34185 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34192 \begin_layout Standard
34193 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34194 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34195 topic inside the user's guide.
34198 \begin_layout Section
34200 \begin_inset Index idx
34203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34217 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34220 \begin_layout Subsection
34224 \begin_layout Standard
34225 Creates a new document.
34228 \begin_layout Subsection
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34233 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34234 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34235 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34238 \begin_layout Subsection
34242 \begin_layout Standard
34246 \begin_layout Subsection
34250 \begin_layout Standard
34251 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34252 Click there on a file to open it.
34255 \begin_layout Subsection
34259 \begin_layout Standard
34260 Closes the current document.
34263 \begin_layout Subsection
34267 \begin_layout Standard
34268 Closes all opened documents.
34271 \begin_layout Subsection
34275 \begin_layout Standard
34276 Saves the actual document.
34279 \begin_layout Subsection
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34287 \begin_layout Subsection
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 Saves all opened documents.
34295 \begin_layout Subsection
34299 \begin_layout Standard
34300 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34303 \begin_layout Subsection
34307 \begin_layout Standard
34308 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34309 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34310 It is described in the section
34312 Version Control in LyX
34316 Additional Features
34321 \begin_layout Subsection
34325 \begin_layout Standard
34326 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34327 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34329 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34332 \begin_layout Standard
34333 When using the menu entry
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34341 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34345 \begin_inset space ~
34349 \begin_inset space ~
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34358 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34359 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34362 \begin_layout Subsection
34364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34373 \begin_layout Standard
34374 You can export your document to various file formats.
34375 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34376 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34377 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34380 \begin_layout Standard
34381 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34383 \begin_inset space ~
34387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34389 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34396 \begin_layout Description
34402 \begin_inset space ~
34409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34416 yX format of the special LyX
34417 \begin_inset space ~
34420 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34421 \begin_inset Newline newline
34424 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34427 \begin_layout Description
34428 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34434 \begin_layout Description
34436 \begin_inset space ~
34439 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34445 \begin_layout Description
34446 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34447 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34448 files paths or file names in your document.
34449 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34456 \begin_layout Description
34457 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34458 in files paths or file names
34461 \begin_layout Description
34463 \begin_inset space ~
34470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34477 eX) DVI-format using the program
34481 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34484 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34492 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34500 \begin_layout Description
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34505 (cropped) the same as
34509 but with cropped page margins.
34512 \begin_layout Description
34514 \begin_inset space ~
34517 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34521 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34526 \begin_layout Description
34527 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34531 \begin_layout Description
34533 \begin_inset space ~
34537 \begin_inset space ~
34540 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34544 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34552 \begin_layout Description
34559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34591 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34596 \begin_layout Description
34603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34611 \begin_inset space ~
34616 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34617 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34621 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34624 \begin_layout Description
34631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34639 \begin_inset space ~
34644 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34645 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34653 \begin_layout Description
34660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34668 \begin_inset space ~
34679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34692 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34697 \begin_layout Description
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34703 \begin_inset space ~
34712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34721 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34722 music notation software
34727 \begin_layout Description
34734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34744 \begin_inset space ~
34747 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (e.
34748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34752 \begin_inset space \space{}
34756 \begin_inset space ~
34760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34775 represent the version number)
34778 \begin_layout Description
34785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34795 \begin_inset space ~
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34802 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34803 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34804 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34807 \begin_layout Description
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34823 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34826 \begin_layout Description
34827 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34832 \begin_layout Description
34833 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34835 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34838 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34842 \begin_layout Description
34844 \begin_inset space ~
34847 (cropped) the same as
34850 \begin_inset space ~
34855 but with cropped page margins.
34858 \begin_layout Description
34862 \begin_inset space ~
34867 PDF-format using the program
34871 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34874 \begin_layout Description
34878 \begin_inset space ~
34885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34894 PDF-format using the program
34898 , produces PDF-files directly
34901 \begin_layout Description
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34910 PDF-format using the program
34914 , produces PDF-files directly
34917 \begin_layout Description
34921 \begin_inset space ~
34926 PDF-format using the program
34930 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34933 \begin_layout Description
34937 \begin_inset space ~
34944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34953 PDF-format using the program
34957 , produces PDF-files directly
34960 \begin_layout Description
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34972 \begin_layout Description
34976 \begin_inset space ~
34980 \begin_inset space ~
34985 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34986 and then exported as text using the program
34991 \begin_layout Description
34996 PostScript format using the program
35001 \begin_layout Description
35002 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
35003 programming language
35016 it is possible to use
35023 \begin_layout Standard
35024 If one of the menu entries
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35040 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
35041 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
35042 \begin_inset space ~
35046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35048 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35053 \begin_inset Index idx
35056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35057 Reconfiguration of LyX
35065 \begin_layout Subsection
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35071 format or send it to a printer.
35072 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35073 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35079 For more information have a look at section
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35086 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35093 \begin_layout Subsection
35097 \begin_layout Standard
35098 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35099 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35100 prefix, see section
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35107 reference "sec:Paths"
35112 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35121 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35122 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35123 \begin_inset space ~
35127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35129 reference "sub:Converters"
35136 \begin_layout Subsection
35137 New and Close Window
35140 \begin_layout Standard
35141 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35144 \begin_layout Subsection
35148 \begin_layout Standard
35149 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35152 \begin_layout Section
35154 \begin_inset Index idx
35157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35166 \begin_layout Subsection
35170 \begin_layout Standard
35171 Described in section
35172 \begin_inset space ~
35176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35178 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35185 \begin_layout Subsection
35186 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35189 \begin_layout Standard
35190 Described in section
35191 \begin_inset space ~
35195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35197 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35204 \begin_layout Subsection
35208 \begin_layout Standard
35209 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35210 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35213 \begin_layout Subsection
35217 \begin_layout Standard
35218 Selects the whole document.
35221 \begin_layout Subsection
35222 Find & Replace (Quick)
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 Described in section
35227 \begin_inset space ~
35231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35233 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35240 \begin_layout Subsection
35241 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35244 \begin_layout Standard
35245 Described in section
35246 \begin_inset space ~
35250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35252 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35259 \begin_layout Subsection
35260 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35264 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35268 \begin_layout Subsection
35272 \begin_layout Standard
35273 Described in section
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35280 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35287 \begin_layout Subsection
35289 \begin_inset Index idx
35292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35293 Paragraph ! Settings
35301 \begin_layout Standard
35302 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35303 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35307 \begin_layout Standard
35308 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35309 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35315 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35316 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35318 \begin_inset space ~
35326 \begin_layout Subsection
35330 \begin_layout Standard
35331 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35332 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35333 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35338 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35340 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35341 The properties of tables are described in section
35342 \begin_inset space ~
35346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35348 reference "sec:Tables"
35352 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35353 \begin_inset space ~
35357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35359 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35366 \begin_layout Subsection
35367 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35370 \begin_layout Standard
35371 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35373 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35374 \begin_inset space ~
35378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35380 reference "sec:Nesting"
35385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35387 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35394 \begin_layout Subsection
35397 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35401 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35402 nts of the same type.
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35410 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35414 for an explanation.
35417 \begin_layout Section
35419 \begin_inset Index idx
35422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35431 \begin_layout Standard
35432 At the bottom of the
35436 menu the opened documents are listed.
35439 \begin_layout Subsection
35440 Open/Close all Insets
35443 \begin_layout Standard
35444 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35447 \begin_layout Subsection
35448 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35451 \begin_layout Standard
35452 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35455 \begin_layout Standard
35456 Math macros are described in the
35463 \begin_layout Subsection
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35475 reference "sec:Navigating"
35480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35482 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35489 \begin_layout Subsection
35493 \begin_layout Standard
35494 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35496 \begin_inset space ~
35500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35502 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35509 \begin_layout Subsection
35513 \begin_layout Standard
35514 Opens a window showing console messages.
35515 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35519 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35520 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35523 \begin_layout Subsection
35525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35527 name "sub:Toolbars"
35532 \begin_inset Index idx
35535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35546 All toolbars and the
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35554 can be turned on and off.
35559 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35583 \begin_inset space ~
35588 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35592 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35599 \begin_layout Standard
35604 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35608 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35609 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35610 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35611 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35612 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35615 \begin_layout Standard
35616 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35623 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35630 \begin_layout Subsection
35634 \begin_layout Standard
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35642 \begin_inset space ~
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_inset space ~
35654 \begin_inset space ~
35658 \begin_inset space ~
35663 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35666 \begin_inset space ~
35670 \begin_inset space ~
35674 \begin_inset space ~
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35682 \begin_inset space ~
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35691 will split it horizontally.
35692 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35693 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35694 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35695 three or more documents at the same time.
35696 To close a split view, use the menu
35699 \begin_inset space ~
35703 \begin_inset space ~
35711 \begin_layout Subsection
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35716 Closes a split view.
35719 \begin_layout Subsection
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35724 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35725 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35726 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35727 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35728 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35731 \begin_layout Section
35733 \begin_inset Index idx
35736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35745 \begin_layout Subsection
35749 \begin_layout Standard
35750 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35757 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35768 \begin_layout Subsection
35770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35772 name "sub:Special-Character"
35779 \begin_layout Standard
35780 Here you can insert the following characters:
35783 \begin_layout Description
35788 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35790 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35791 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35792 You can get a complete display by checking
35795 \begin_inset space ~
35801 \begin_inset Newline newline
35805 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 Not all characters will be visible in the
35817 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35825 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35829 ) can display every character.
35837 \begin_layout Description
35838 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35842 \begin_layout Description
35844 \begin_inset space ~
35848 \begin_inset space ~
35851 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35852 \begin_inset space ~
35856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35858 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35865 \begin_layout Description
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35870 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35873 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35874 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35880 \begin_layout Description
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35885 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35888 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35889 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35895 \begin_layout Description
35897 \begin_inset space ~
35900 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35904 \begin_layout Description
35906 \begin_inset space ~
35909 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35913 \begin_layout Description
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35918 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35924 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35930 \begin_layout Description
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35935 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35939 \begin_layout Description
35941 \begin_inset space ~
35945 \begin_inset Index idx
35948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35955 \begin_inset Index idx
35958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35959 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35964 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35965 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35967 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35972 \begin_inset Index idx
35975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35976 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35982 \begin_inset Newline newline
35985 More information about this feature can be found in the
35991 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35997 \begin_layout Subsection
36001 \begin_layout Standard
36002 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36005 \begin_layout Description
36006 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36007 \begin_inset script superscript
36009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36018 \begin_layout Description
36019 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36020 \begin_inset script subscript
36022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36031 \begin_layout Description
36033 \begin_inset space ~
36036 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36043 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36050 \begin_layout Description
36052 \begin_inset space ~
36055 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36056 \begin_inset space ~
36060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36062 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36069 \begin_layout Description
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36074 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36075 \begin_inset space ~
36079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36081 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36088 \begin_layout Description
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36093 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36099 \begin_inset space \space{}
36102 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36103 An example from the LyX
36108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36111 To insert a fraction use the command
36116 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36120 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36129 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36136 \begin_layout Description
36138 \begin_inset space ~
36141 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36148 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36155 \begin_layout Description
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36160 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36167 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36174 \begin_layout Description
36176 \begin_inset space ~
36179 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36180 \begin_inset space ~
36184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36186 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36193 \begin_layout Description
36194 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36195 \begin_inset space ~
36199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36201 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36208 \begin_layout Description
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36213 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36220 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36227 \begin_layout Description
36229 \begin_inset space ~
36232 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36239 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36246 \begin_layout Description
36248 \begin_inset space ~
36252 \begin_inset space ~
36255 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36256 \begin_inset space ~
36260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36262 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36269 \begin_layout Description
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36274 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36275 as described in section
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36282 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36289 \begin_layout Description
36291 \begin_inset space ~
36294 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36295 \begin_inset space ~
36299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36301 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36308 \begin_layout Description
36310 \begin_inset space ~
36313 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36314 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36316 \begin_inset space ~
36320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36322 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36329 \begin_layout Description
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36334 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36341 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36348 \begin_layout Description
36350 \begin_inset space ~
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36357 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36364 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36371 \begin_layout Subsection
36375 \begin_layout Standard
36376 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36401 are described in section
36402 \begin_inset space ~
36406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36408 reference "sec:toc"
36417 is described in section
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36424 reference "sec:Index"
36432 is described in section
36433 \begin_inset space ~
36437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36439 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36445 BibTeX Bibliography
36447 is described in section
36448 \begin_inset space ~
36452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36454 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36461 \begin_layout Subsection
36465 \begin_layout Standard
36466 To insert floats, as described in section
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36473 reference "sec:Floats"
36477 and in detail the chapter
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36492 \begin_layout Subsection
36496 \begin_layout Standard
36497 To insert notes, described in section
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36504 reference "sec:Notes"
36511 \begin_layout Subsection
36515 \begin_layout Standard
36516 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36518 Branches are described in section
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36525 reference "sec:Branches"
36532 \begin_layout Subsection
36536 \begin_layout Standard
36537 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36538 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36540 An example is the document class
36541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36548 with three custom insets.
36551 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36555 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36561 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36564 \begin_layout Subsection
36566 \begin_inset Index idx
36569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36578 \begin_layout Standard
36579 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36581 For more information see chapter
36583 External Document Parts
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_layout Subsection
36594 \begin_inset Index idx
36597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36606 \begin_layout Standard
36607 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36608 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36615 \begin_inset space ~
36623 \begin_layout Subsection
36627 \begin_layout Standard
36632 dialog as described in section
36633 \begin_inset space ~
36637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36639 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36646 \begin_layout Subsection
36650 \begin_layout Standard
36655 as described in section
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36662 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36669 \begin_layout Subsection
36673 \begin_layout Standard
36678 as described in section
36679 \begin_inset space ~
36683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36685 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36692 \begin_layout Subsection
36694 \begin_inset Index idx
36697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36704 \begin_inset Index idx
36707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36708 Longtables ! Caption
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36717 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36718 Floats are described in section
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36725 reference "sec:Floats"
36729 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36736 \begin_inset space ~
36744 \begin_layout Subsection
36748 \begin_layout Standard
36749 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36756 reference "sec:Index"
36763 \begin_layout Subsection
36767 \begin_layout Standard
36768 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36775 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36782 \begin_layout Subsection
36786 \begin_layout Standard
36787 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36788 Tables are described in section
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36795 reference "sec:Tables"
36799 and in detail in the chapter
36806 \begin_inset space ~
36814 \begin_layout Subsection
36818 \begin_layout Standard
36824 Graphics are described in section
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36831 reference "sec:Graphics"
36838 \begin_layout Subsection
36842 \begin_layout Standard
36843 Inserts a URL as described in section
36844 \begin_inset space ~
36848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36850 reference "sub:URLs"
36857 \begin_layout Subsection
36861 \begin_layout Standard
36862 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36869 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36876 \begin_layout Subsection
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36888 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36895 \begin_layout Subsection
36899 \begin_layout Standard
36900 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36901 \begin_inset space ~
36905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36907 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36914 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36920 title or caption of a float.
36921 Inserts a short title as described in section
36922 \begin_inset space ~
36926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36928 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36935 \begin_layout Subsection
36939 \begin_layout Standard
36940 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36941 \begin_inset space ~
36945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36947 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36954 \begin_layout Subsection
36956 \begin_inset Index idx
36959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36969 Inserts a program listings box.
36970 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36972 Program Code Listings
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36985 \begin_layout Subsection
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36990 Inserts the actual date.
36991 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36993 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37009 \begin_layout Subsection
37013 \begin_layout Standard
37014 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37015 \begin_inset space ~
37019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37021 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37028 \begin_layout Section
37030 \begin_inset Index idx
37033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37042 \begin_layout Standard
37043 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37044 \begin_inset space ~
37047 of the current document.
37048 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37051 \begin_layout Subsection
37055 \begin_layout Standard
37056 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37057 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37058 to jump, for example, between section
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37063 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37067 2.5 and use the submenu
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37081 \begin_inset space ~
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37097 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37101 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37107 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37110 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37113 \begin_layout Standard
37114 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37118 \begin_inset space ~
37123 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37131 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37134 \begin_layout Subsection
37135 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37138 \begin_layout Standard
37139 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37143 \begin_layout Subsection
37147 \begin_layout Standard
37148 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37149 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37150 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37166 \begin_layout Subsection
37170 \begin_layout Standard
37171 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37174 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37184 \begin_inset space ~
37189 manual for a detailed description.
37192 \begin_layout Section
37194 \begin_inset Index idx
37197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37206 \begin_layout Subsection
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 Change Tracking is described in section
37212 \begin_inset space ~
37216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37218 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37225 \begin_layout Subsection
37230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37240 \begin_layout Standard
37241 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37243 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37244 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37245 to the clipboard or update the view.
37246 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37249 \begin_layout Subsection
37250 Start Appendix Here
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37255 as described in section
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37262 reference "sec:Appendices"
37269 \begin_layout Subsection
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37277 \begin_layout Standard
37278 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37279 default output format for the document (menu
37281 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37282 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37283 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37289 \begin_inset space ~
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37301 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37305 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37307 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37308 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37313 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37318 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37320 \begin_inset space ~
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37336 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37340 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37341 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37343 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37344 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37349 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37354 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37358 \begin_inset space ~
37362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37364 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37369 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37370 The default output format is
37373 \begin_inset space ~
37381 \begin_layout Subsection
37382 View (Other Formats)
37385 \begin_layout Standard
37386 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37387 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37388 actual document with an external program.
37389 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37390 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37391 All possible formats are listed in section
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37398 reference "sub:Export"
37403 You should at least see the menu entry
37408 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37409 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37416 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37421 \begin_inset Index idx
37424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37425 Reconfiguration of LyX
37433 \begin_layout Standard
37434 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37435 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37437 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37438 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37443 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37445 \begin_inset space ~
37448 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37452 \begin_inset space ~
37456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37458 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37463 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37466 \begin_layout Subsection
37468 \begin_inset space ~
37474 \begin_layout Standard
37475 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37476 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37479 \begin_layout Subsection
37480 Update (Other Formats)
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37484 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37485 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37488 \begin_layout Subsection
37489 View Master Document
37492 \begin_layout Standard
37493 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37509 \begin_inset space ~
37514 manual for more information on this topic).
37515 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37516 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37524 \begin_inset space ~
37529 generates the output of the whole book, while
37533 will just output the chapter alone.
37536 \begin_layout Standard
37537 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37538 in the document settings (menu
37540 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37541 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37542 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37544 \begin_inset space ~
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37560 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37564 ) or in the preferences (menu
37566 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37567 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37572 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37577 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37579 \begin_inset space ~
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37595 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37602 \begin_layout Subsection
37603 Update Master Document
37606 \begin_layout Standard
37607 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37628 manual for more information on this topic).
37629 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37630 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37633 \begin_layout Standard
37634 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37635 in the document settings (menu
37637 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37638 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37639 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37657 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37661 ) or in the preferences (menu
37663 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37664 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37666 \begin_inset space ~
37669 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37674 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37699 \begin_layout Subsection
37703 \begin_layout Standard
37704 Un/compresses the current document.
37707 \begin_layout Subsection
37711 \begin_layout Standard
37712 The document settings are described in appendix
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37719 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37726 \begin_layout Section
37728 \begin_inset Index idx
37731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37740 \begin_layout Subsection
37744 \begin_layout Standard
37745 Spell checking is explained in section
37746 \begin_inset space ~
37750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37752 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37759 \begin_layout Subsection
37763 \begin_layout Standard
37764 The thesaurus is described in section
37765 \begin_inset space ~
37769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37771 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37778 \begin_layout Subsection
37780 \begin_inset Index idx
37783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37790 \begin_inset Index idx
37793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37802 \begin_layout Standard
37803 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37804 the highlighted document part.
37807 \begin_layout Subsection
37812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37820 \begin_inset Index idx
37823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37832 \begin_layout Standard
37833 Generates with the help of the program
37837 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37838 This feature is not available on Windows.
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37854 \begin_inset Index idx
37857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37866 \begin_layout Standard
37867 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37872 \begin_inset space ~
37877 to see the full filename paths.
37880 \begin_layout Subsection
37882 \begin_inset Index idx
37885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37894 \begin_layout Standard
37895 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37896 \begin_inset space ~
37900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37902 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37909 \begin_layout Subsection
37911 \begin_inset Index idx
37914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37915 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37926 Reconfiguration of LyX
37930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37943 \begin_inset Index idx
37946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37947 Reconfiguration of LyX
37955 \begin_layout Standard
37956 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37957 needs; see also section
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37964 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37971 \begin_layout Subsection
37975 \begin_layout Standard
37980 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37981 \begin_inset space ~
37985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37987 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37994 \begin_layout Section
37996 \begin_inset Index idx
37999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 \begin_layout Standard
38009 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
38011 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38015 \begin_layout Standard
38019 \begin_inset space ~
38024 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
38025 found by LyX (see also section
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38032 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38039 \begin_layout Standard
38043 \begin_inset space ~
38050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38059 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38063 \begin_layout Section
38065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38067 name "sec:Toolbars"
38074 \begin_layout Standard
38075 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38076 \begin_inset space ~
38080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38082 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38089 \begin_layout Standard
38090 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38091 This is described in the
38093 Additional Features
38098 \begin_layout Subsection
38100 \begin_inset Index idx
38103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 \begin_inset Graphics
38114 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38122 \begin_layout Standard
38123 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38129 \begin_layout Standard
38130 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38147 \begin_inset Note Note
38150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38151 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38156 manual for more information.
38164 \begin_layout Standard
38165 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38171 \begin_layout Standard
38172 \begin_inset Tabular
38173 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38174 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38182 \begin_inset Graphics
38183 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38197 pull-down box for the environments
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38217 \begin_layout Standard
38219 \begin_inset Tabular
38220 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38221 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38222 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38223 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38247 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38277 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38307 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38323 arg "dialog-show print"
38331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38337 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38353 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38367 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38397 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38457 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38487 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38517 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38524 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38533 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38573 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38587 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38615 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38629 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38630 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38658 Emphasize text, function of the
38660 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38665 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 Set text to noun style, function of the
38697 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38702 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38720 arg "textstyle-apply"
38728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38732 Format text using the current settings in the
38734 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38736 \begin_inset space ~
38739 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38772 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38774 \begin_inset space ~
38783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38792 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38806 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38820 arg "tabular-insert"
38828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38834 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38850 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 Toggle outline window on/off,
38864 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38880 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38892 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38907 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38932 \begin_layout Subsection
38934 \begin_inset Index idx
38937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38946 \begin_layout Standard
38947 \begin_inset Graphics
38948 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38956 \begin_layout Standard
38957 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38963 \begin_layout Standard
38964 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38968 \begin_layout Standard
38969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38975 \begin_layout Standard
38976 \begin_inset Tabular
38977 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38978 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38979 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38980 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39017 arg "layout Enumerate"
39025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39044 arg "layout Itemize"
39052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 arg "layout Description"
39106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39116 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39125 arg "depth-increment"
39133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39141 \begin_inset space ~
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 arg "depth-decrement"
39171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39177 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39179 \begin_inset space ~
39183 \begin_inset space ~
39192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39201 arg "float-insert figure"
39209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39215 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39216 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39232 arg "float-insert table"
39240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39246 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39247 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39277 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39293 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39307 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39323 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39337 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39369 \begin_inset space ~
39378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 arg "nomencl-insert"
39395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39401 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39403 \begin_inset space ~
39412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39421 arg "footnote-insert"
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39451 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39465 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39499 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39500 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39513 \begin_inset space ~
39522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39531 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39545 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39575 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39605 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 \begin_inset space ~
39631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39640 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39655 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39671 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39686 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39688 \begin_inset space ~
39697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39706 arg "dialog-show character"
39714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39720 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39725 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39732 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39741 arg "layout-paragraph"
39749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39755 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39789 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39803 \begin_layout Subsection
39804 View/Update Toolbar
39805 \begin_inset Index idx
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 Toolbar ! View / Update
39817 \begin_layout Standard
39818 \begin_inset Graphics
39819 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39826 \begin_layout Standard
39827 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39833 \begin_layout Standard
39834 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39838 \begin_layout Standard
39839 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39845 \begin_layout Standard
39846 \begin_inset Tabular
39847 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39848 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39849 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39850 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39874 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 arg "buffer-update"
39898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39904 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 arg "master-buffer-view"
39928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39934 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39936 \begin_inset space ~
39945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39954 arg "master-buffer-update"
39962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39968 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39974 \begin_inset space ~
39983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39992 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40007 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40008 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40009 Synchronize with Output
40015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40020 \begin_inset Graphics
40021 filename ../images/view-others.png
40023 groupId toolbarbuttons
40034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40040 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40041 View (Other Formats)
40047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40052 \begin_inset Graphics
40053 filename ../images/update-others.png
40055 groupId toolbarbuttons
40064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40071 Update (Other Formats)
40084 \begin_layout Standard
40085 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40089 \begin_layout Subsection
40093 \begin_layout Standard
40094 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40101 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40105 , the table toolbar
40106 \begin_inset Index idx
40109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40118 \begin_inset space ~
40123 manual and the math macro toolbar
40124 \begin_inset Index idx
40127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40140 \begin_layout Chapter
40141 The Document Settings
40142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40144 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40149 \begin_inset Index idx
40152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40153 Document ! Settings
40161 \begin_layout Standard
40165 \begin_inset space ~
40170 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40171 is called with the menu
40173 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40177 You can save your document settings as default with the
40179 Save as Document Defaults
40181 button in any dialog.
40182 This will create a template named
40186 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40190 \begin_layout Standard
40195 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40196 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40199 \begin_layout Standard
40200 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40201 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40202 to find the one you are looking for.
40203 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40204 the submenus of the dialog.
40206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40210 \begin_inset space \space{}
40214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40221 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40222 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40223 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40226 \begin_layout Section
40230 \begin_layout Standard
40231 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40233 Document classes are described in section
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40240 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40248 \begin_layout Standard
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40257 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40261 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40262 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40264 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40273 \begin_layout Standard
40274 Some classes use special class options by default.
40275 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40279 and you can decide to use them or not.
40280 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40281 recommended you leave them untouched.
40286 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40291 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40292 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40298 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40299 \begin_inset Newline newline
40304 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40307 \begin_inset Newline newline
40310 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40316 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40318 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40330 \begin_layout Standard
40335 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40336 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40337 document is opened without its master.
40338 This way child documents are always compilable.
40339 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40354 \begin_layout Standard
40355 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40365 \begin_inset Index idx
40368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40369 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40375 \begin_inset Index idx
40378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40379 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40384 for cross-references, see section
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40391 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40398 \begin_layout Section
40402 \begin_layout Standard
40403 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40404 Please refer to the section
40407 \begin_inset space ~
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40420 manual for details.
40423 \begin_layout Section
40427 \begin_layout Standard
40428 Modules are explained in section
40429 \begin_inset space ~
40433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40435 reference "sub:Modules"
40442 \begin_layout Section
40446 \begin_layout Standard
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40454 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40461 \begin_layout Section
40465 \begin_layout Standard
40466 The document font settings are described in section
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40473 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40480 \begin_layout Section
40484 \begin_layout Standard
40485 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40502 and whether it should be a
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40510 can also be specified here.
40513 \begin_layout Standard
40514 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40516 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40518 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40521 \begin_layout Standard
40524 Use justification in LyX work area
40526 you can decide if LyX justifies the text on screen.
40527 This only affects the text inside LyX not in the output.
40530 \begin_layout Section
40534 \begin_layout Standard
40535 This dialog is described in sections
40536 \begin_inset space ~
40540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40542 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40549 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40556 \begin_layout Section
40560 \begin_layout Standard
40561 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40568 reference "sub:Margins"
40575 \begin_layout Section
40577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40579 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40584 \begin_inset Index idx
40587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40588 Language ! Encoding
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40598 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40599 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40600 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40601 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40602 known for a particular character).
40605 \begin_layout Standard
40606 If you use the option
40610 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40611 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40612 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40613 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40614 exactly one encoding.
40615 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40619 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40620 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40621 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40622 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40623 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40624 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40629 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40630 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40631 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40632 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40633 engines to standard LaTeX.
40634 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40635 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40638 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40657 \begin_inset space ~
40664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40676 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40688 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40693 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40697 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40700 \begin_layout Standard
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40709 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40719 The possible settings are:
40722 \begin_layout Description
40723 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40725 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40726 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40736 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40743 \begin_layout Description
40744 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40745 format you will use.
40746 In many cases this will be
40751 \begin_inset Index idx
40754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40755 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40761 If the newer package
40766 \begin_inset Index idx
40769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40770 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40775 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40776 this package will be used instead of
40783 \begin_layout Description
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40796 would be more appropriate.
40799 \begin_layout Description
40800 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40801 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40805 (for German texts), type in
40808 \begin_inset Newline newline
40813 usepackage{ngerman}
40816 \begin_layout Description
40817 None will not use a language package.
40818 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40821 \begin_layout Standard
40822 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40825 \begin_layout Description
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40842 , but the LaTeX-package
40847 \begin_inset Index idx
40850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40851 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40857 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40858 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40859 languages in TeX code.
40862 \begin_layout Description
40863 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40864 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40865 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40868 \begin_layout Description
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40877 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40880 \begin_layout Description
40882 \begin_inset space ~
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40889 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40892 \begin_layout Description
40894 \begin_inset space ~
40897 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40900 \begin_layout Description
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40909 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40910 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40913 \begin_layout Description
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40922 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40926 \begin_layout Description
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40935 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40936 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40939 \begin_layout Description
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_inset space ~
40952 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40959 \begin_layout Description
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40972 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40973 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40976 \begin_layout Description
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40985 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40986 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40987 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40998 \begin_layout Description
41000 \begin_inset space ~
41004 \begin_inset space ~
41007 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41008 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41009 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
41010 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_layout Description
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41030 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41033 \begin_layout Description
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41042 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41045 \begin_layout Description
41047 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41054 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41057 \begin_layout Description
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41062 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41065 \begin_layout Description
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41070 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41073 \begin_layout Description
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41082 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41085 \begin_layout Description
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_layout Description
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41106 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41109 \begin_layout Description
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_layout Description
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41130 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41135 \begin_inset Index idx
41138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41139 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41144 , when using this, set the document language to
41149 \begin_layout Description
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41158 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41162 , when using this, set the document language to
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_layout Description
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41180 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41185 \begin_inset Index idx
41188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41194 , when using this, set the document language to
41199 \begin_layout Description
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41208 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41212 , when using this, set the document language to
41217 \begin_layout Description
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41226 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41230 , when using this, set the document language to
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41240 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41243 \begin_layout Description
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41256 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41259 \begin_layout Description
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41272 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41273 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41274 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41277 \begin_layout Description
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41283 \begin_inset space ~
41289 \begin_layout Description
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41298 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41299 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41302 \begin_layout Description
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41311 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41316 \begin_inset Index idx
41319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41320 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41325 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41328 \begin_layout Description
41330 \begin_inset space ~
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41337 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41345 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41350 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41352 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41355 \begin_layout Description
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41364 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41369 \begin_inset Index idx
41372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41373 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41378 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41381 \begin_layout Description
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41386 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41391 \begin_inset Index idx
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41395 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41401 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41405 \begin_layout Description
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41418 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41425 \begin_layout Description
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41438 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41439 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41440 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41444 \begin_layout Description
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41454 \begin_inset space ~
41457 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41458 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41461 \begin_layout Section
41463 \begin_inset Index idx
41466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41473 \begin_inset Index idx
41476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 \begin_inset Index idx
41486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41487 Color ! Shaded boxes
41493 \begin_inset Index idx
41496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41497 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41505 \begin_layout Standard
41506 Here you can alter the font color for the
41510 (default: black), for
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41518 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41522 (default: white) and for
41525 \begin_inset space ~
41535 sets the color back to the default.
41538 \begin_layout Standard
41539 Clicking any button showing
41547 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41548 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41549 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41550 later more quickly.
41553 \begin_layout Standard
41554 Note, if you change the
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41562 font color and use the option
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41570 in the document settings under
41573 \begin_inset space ~
41578 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41585 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41592 \begin_layout Standard
41593 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41599 \begin_layout Standard
41603 \begin_inset space ~
41612 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41617 Code after a forced page break:
41620 \begin_layout Itemize
41621 For the page color:
41622 \begin_inset Newline newline
41629 pagecolor{color name}
41632 \begin_layout Itemize
41633 For the text color:
41634 \begin_inset Newline newline
41644 \begin_layout Standard
41645 You are restricted to one of
41681 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41694 \begin_inset Newline newline
41697 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41698 names to refer to them:
41701 \begin_layout Itemize
41707 \begin_inset Newline newline
41712 page_backgroundcolor
41715 \begin_layout Itemize
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41725 \begin_inset Newline newline
41733 \begin_layout Itemize
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41743 \begin_inset Newline newline
41751 \begin_layout Itemize
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41761 \begin_inset Newline newline
41769 \begin_layout Standard
41770 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41773 \begin_inset space ~
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_layout Section
41793 \begin_layout Standard
41794 Here you can adjust the
41798 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41802 as described in section
41803 \begin_inset space ~
41807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41809 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41816 \begin_layout Section
41820 \begin_layout Standard
41821 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41826 \begin_inset Index idx
41829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41830 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41840 \begin_inset Index idx
41843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41844 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41852 Sectioned bibliography
41854 using the LaTeX package
41859 \begin_inset Index idx
41862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41863 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41868 and you can select a
41872 for the generation of the bibliography.
41873 For a further description see section
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41880 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41887 \begin_layout Section
41891 \begin_layout Standard
41892 Here you can define the
41896 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41904 reference "sec:Index"
41911 \begin_layout Section
41915 \begin_layout Standard
41916 The PDF properties are explained in section
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41923 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41930 \begin_layout Section
41934 \begin_layout Standard
41935 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41940 \begin_inset Index idx
41943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41944 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41954 \begin_inset Index idx
41957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41958 LaTeX-packages ! amssymb
41968 \begin_inset Index idx
41971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41972 LaTeX-packages ! cancel
41982 \begin_inset Index idx
41985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41986 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41996 \begin_inset Index idx
41999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42000 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
42010 \begin_inset Index idx
42013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42014 LaTeX-packages ! mathtools
42024 \begin_inset Index idx
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42028 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
42038 \begin_inset Index idx
42041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42042 LaTeX-packages ! stackrel
42052 \begin_inset Index idx
42055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42056 LaTeX-packages ! stmaryrd
42066 \begin_inset Index idx
42069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42070 LaTeX-packages ! undertilde
42075 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42078 \begin_layout Description
42079 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
42080 ensure that you have this enabled.
42083 \begin_layout Description
42084 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42085 letters, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, ensure that you have
42089 \begin_layout Description
42090 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42105 \begin_layout Description
42106 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42109 \begin_inset space ~
42121 \begin_layout Description
42122 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42133 \begin_layout Description
42134 mathtools is used for the math commands
42170 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42177 \begin_layout Description
42178 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42180 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42189 \begin_layout Description
42190 stackrel is used for the math command
42207 \begin_layout Description
42208 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42211 \begin_layout Description
42212 undertilde is used for the math command
42220 Accents for one Character
42229 \begin_layout Section
42233 \begin_layout Standard
42234 The float placement options are described in the section
42237 \begin_inset space ~
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_layout Section
42257 \begin_layout Standard
42258 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42260 Program Code Listings
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42273 \begin_layout Section
42277 \begin_layout Standard
42278 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42286 set to be used and set the
42291 The itemize environment is described in section
42292 \begin_inset space ~
42296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42298 reference "sec:Itemize"
42305 \begin_layout Standard
42306 You can furthermore specify a
42309 \begin_inset space ~
42314 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42315 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42322 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42328 \begin_inset space \space{}
42332 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42342 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42343 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42346 \begin_layout Standard
42347 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42358 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42359 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42361 \begin_inset space ~
42367 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42371 usepackage{textcomp}
42374 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42378 usepackage{amssymb}
42388 \begin_layout Section
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42393 Branches are described in section
42394 \begin_inset space ~
42398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42400 reference "sec:Branches"
42407 \begin_layout Section
42409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42411 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42418 \begin_layout Standard
42419 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42422 \begin_layout Description
42424 \begin_inset space ~
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42431 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42451 View Master Document
42452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42459 Update Master Document
42460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42467 menu or the toolbar.
42468 The default is set in
42470 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42471 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42473 \begin_inset space ~
42476 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42486 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42493 \begin_layout Description
42495 \begin_inset space ~
42499 \begin_inset space ~
42502 Output settings for the menu
42504 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42506 \begin_inset space ~
42512 For a detailed description see section
42514 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42527 \begin_layout Description
42529 \begin_inset space ~
42533 \begin_inset space ~
42536 Options offers settings for the export format
42542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 \begin_inset space ~
42560 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42561 \begin_inset space ~
42564 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42573 settings are described in detail in section
42575 Math Output in XHTML
42580 \begin_inset space ~
42589 \begin_inset space ~
42593 \begin_inset space ~
42598 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42601 \begin_layout Section
42606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42616 \begin_layout Standard
42617 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42618 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42619 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42620 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42624 \begin_layout Standard
42625 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42632 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42639 \begin_layout Chapter
42645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42647 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42652 \begin_inset Index idx
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42664 \begin_layout Standard
42665 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42667 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42671 It has the following submenus.
42674 \begin_layout Section
42678 \begin_layout Subsection
42682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42683 User Interface File
42684 \begin_inset Index idx
42687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42688 Customization ! of toolbars
42694 \begin_inset Index idx
42697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42698 Customization ! of menus
42706 \begin_layout Standard
42707 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42708 interface (ui) file.
42709 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42717 \begin_layout Description
42722 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42725 \begin_layout Description
42732 the menu entries in popup context menus
42735 \begin_layout Description
42740 specifies the toolbar buttons
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42745 and edit the entries.
42748 \begin_layout Standard
42749 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42761 entries must be finished with an explicit
42786 and in the case of the
42787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42799 The syntax for the entries is:
42802 \begin_layout Standard
42803 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42831 \begin_layout Standard
42833 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42836 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42838 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42860 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42866 \begin_layout Standard
42867 For example, assuming you use the menu
42869 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42872 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42876 \begin_layout Standard
42877 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42901 \begin_layout Standard
42903 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42918 to have the sixth bookmark.
42921 \begin_layout Standard
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42930 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42931 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42932 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42935 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42946 \begin_layout Standard
42949 Enable tool tips in main work area
42951 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42959 \begin_layout Standard
42964 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42967 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42969 \begin_inset space ~
42977 \begin_layout Subsection
42981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42985 \begin_layout Standard
42988 Restore window layouts and geometries
42990 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42991 in the last LyX session.
42994 \begin_layout Standard
42997 Restore cursor positions
42999 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43003 \begin_layout Standard
43006 Load opened files from last session
43008 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
43011 \begin_layout Standard
43014 Clear all session information
43016 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
43017 of last opened documents, etc.).
43020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43024 name "sub:Backup documents"
43029 \begin_inset Index idx
43032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 \begin_layout Standard
43044 Backup original documents when saving
43046 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43047 it was saved the last time.
43048 It is stored in the
43051 \begin_inset space ~
43057 \begin_inset space ~
43061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43063 reference "sec:Paths"
43067 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43070 \begin_inset space ~
43076 The backup file has the file extension
43077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43091 \begin_layout Standard
43094 Backup documents, every
43096 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43099 \begin_layout Standard
43102 Save documents compressed by default
43104 always saves files in a compressed format.
43107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43108 Windows & work area
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43114 Open documents in tabs
43116 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43124 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
43128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43136 reference "sec:Paths"
43140 for information about LyXServer pipes.
43146 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
43148 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
43151 \begin_layout Standard
43154 Single close-tab button
43156 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43159 \begin_inset Graphics
43160 filename ../images/closetab.png
43167 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43168 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43171 \begin_layout Standard
43172 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43180 For this option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
43188 \begin_layout Standard
43193 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43195 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43197 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43201 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43202 instances of LyX and only want to close the view in once instance.
43205 \begin_layout Subsection
43207 \begin_inset Index idx
43210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43219 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
43226 \begin_layout Standard
43227 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
43230 \begin_layout Standard
43231 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43239 This section only deals with the fonts
43244 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43248 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43259 \begin_layout Standard
43260 By default, LyX uses
43276 (depends on the system) as its
43279 \begin_inset space ~
43295 \begin_layout Standard
43296 You can change the font size with the
43303 \begin_layout Standard
43308 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43313 points have the size of 1
43314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43318 \begin_inset space ~
43322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43324 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43329 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43334 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43341 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43351 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43353 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43354 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43355 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43356 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43358 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43359 \begin_inset space ~
43365 \begin_layout Subsection
43367 \begin_inset Index idx
43370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43377 \begin_inset Index idx
43380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43389 \begin_layout Standard
43390 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43391 the list and selecting the
43398 \begin_layout Standard
43399 By checking the option
43403 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43406 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43416 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43419 \begin_layout Subsection
43421 \begin_inset Index idx
43424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43434 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43437 \begin_layout Standard
43442 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43443 This feature is described in section
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43450 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43457 \begin_layout Standard
43458 Checking the option
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset space ~
43474 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43477 \begin_layout Section
43479 \begin_inset Index idx
43482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43491 \begin_layout Subsection
43495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43499 \begin_layout Standard
43502 Cursor follows scrollbar
43504 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43508 \begin_layout Standard
43509 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43510 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43511 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43514 \begin_layout Standard
43517 Scroll below end of document
43519 is self-explanatory.
43522 \begin_layout Standard
43523 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43530 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43532 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43533 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43536 \begin_layout Standard
43539 Sort environments alphabetically
43541 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43544 \begin_layout Standard
43547 Group environments by their category
43549 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43552 \begin_layout Standard
43557 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43573 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43578 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43579 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43583 \begin_layout Subsection
43585 \begin_inset Index idx
43588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43595 \begin_inset Index idx
43598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43599 Settings ! Shortcuts
43607 \begin_layout Standard
43612 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43613 Several binding files are available, among them:
43616 \begin_layout Description
43617 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43620 \begin_layout Description
43621 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43633 \begin_layout Description
43634 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43645 \begin_layout Standard
43646 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43651 , and binding files for special languages.
43652 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43657 \begin_inset space \space{}
43661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43669 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43673 \begin_layout Standard
43674 Some binding files, like
43678 , only have a limited scope.
43679 When looking at the end of the file
43683 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43686 \begin_layout Standard
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43699 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43700 in the selected key binding file.
43703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43707 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43712 \begin_inset Index idx
43715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43716 Key Bindings ! Editing
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43725 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43726 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43727 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43730 Show key-bindings containing
43733 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43734 Insert there for example as keyword
43735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43742 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43743 functions that contain
43744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43752 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43753 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43757 that you will find in the
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 For example, to add the shortcut
43773 , select the function and press the
43778 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43779 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43782 \begin_layout Standard
43783 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43784 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43785 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43786 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43787 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43792 \begin_layout Standard
43793 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43796 \begin_layout Standard
43797 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43799 The syntax of the entries is:
43802 \begin_layout Standard
43808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43826 \begin_layout Subsection
43828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43830 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43835 \begin_inset Index idx
43838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43845 \begin_inset Index idx
43848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43849 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43857 \begin_layout Standard
43858 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43859 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43860 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43861 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43868 \begin_inset space ~
43873 and select the keyboard map file named
43880 \begin_layout Standard
43889 keyboard map and, if you use the
43893 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43896 arg "keymap-primary"
43902 arg "keymap-secondary"
43905 respectively or toggle between them with
43908 arg "keymap-toggle"
43914 \begin_layout Standard
43915 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43923 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43932 \begin_layout Standard
43933 You can also specify the mouse
43935 Wheel scrolling speed
43938 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43942 \begin_layout Standard
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43954 \begin_inset space ~
43959 you can select a key for zooming.
43960 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43963 \begin_layout Subsection
43967 \begin_layout Standard
43968 Input completion is described in section
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43975 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43982 \begin_layout Section
43984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43991 \begin_inset Index idx
43994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44001 \begin_inset Index idx
44004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 \begin_layout Standard
44014 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
44016 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44019 \begin_layout Description
44021 \begin_inset space ~
44024 directory This is LyX's working directory.
44025 It is the default when you
44036 \begin_inset space ~
44044 \begin_layout Description
44046 \begin_inset space ~
44049 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44051 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44065 \begin_layout Description
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44070 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44076 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44080 \begin_inset Newline newline
44084 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44096 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44104 \begin_layout Description
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44110 \begin_inset Index idx
44113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44119 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44120 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44127 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44135 will be used to save the backups.
44136 \begin_inset Newline newline
44139 Backup files have the ending
44140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44150 \begin_layout Description
44155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44166 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44167 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
44168 \begin_inset Newline newline
44175 You add a BibTeX-database
44180 You can edit this file with the program
44189 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
44192 \begin_inset space ~
44198 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44203 and click on the LyX-symbol.
44204 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44210 and LyX need to be running the same time.
44211 \begin_inset Newline newline
44214 The pipe is also used for the
44219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44225 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44230 \begin_inset Newline newline
44233 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44234 \begin_inset Newline newline
44250 \begin_layout Description
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44255 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44258 \begin_layout Description
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44263 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44264 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44265 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44268 \begin_layout Description
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44273 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44279 You only need to specify it if you are using
44283 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44289 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44293 \begin_layout Description
44295 \begin_inset space ~
44298 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44299 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44300 where to find it on the system.
44301 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44302 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44311 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44312 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44315 \begin_layout Description
44317 \begin_inset space ~
44320 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44321 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44323 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44325 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44326 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44327 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44328 scanned for the input files.
44329 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44330 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44331 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44332 compilation may fail for some documents.
44335 \begin_layout Section
44339 \begin_layout Standard
44340 Here you can insert your
44349 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44351 \begin_inset space ~
44355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44357 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44361 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44364 \begin_layout Section
44366 \begin_inset Index idx
44369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44370 Language ! Settings
44376 \begin_inset Index idx
44379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44380 Settings ! Language
44388 \begin_layout Subsection
44390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44392 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44399 \begin_layout Description
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44408 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44409 You can find its actual translation status here:
44410 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44412 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44419 \begin_layout Description
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44424 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44426 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44427 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44444 The most widespread language package is
44449 \begin_inset Index idx
44452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44453 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44458 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44459 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44460 alternative language package
44465 \begin_inset Index idx
44468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44469 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44474 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44475 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44481 The available selections are described in section
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44488 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44495 \begin_layout Description
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44500 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44501 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44502 An example is the start command
44508 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44528 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44533 \begin_layout Description
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44543 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44544 command toggles the package on and off.
44547 \begin_layout Description
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44553 \begin_inset space ~
44556 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44560 \begin_layout Description
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44566 \begin_inset space ~
44569 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in LyX's dialogs.
44572 \begin_layout Description
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44581 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44582 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44583 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44584 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44591 \begin_layout Description
44593 \begin_inset space ~
44596 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44598 When this option is not set, the
44601 \begin_inset space ~
44606 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44607 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44610 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \begin_layout Description
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44632 When it is not set, the
44635 \begin_inset space ~
44640 is set to the end of the document.
44643 \begin_layout Description
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44649 \begin_inset space ~
44652 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44653 language will be underlined in blue.
44656 \begin_layout Description
44658 \begin_inset space ~
44662 \begin_inset space ~
44665 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44666 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44669 \begin_layout Description
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44674 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44675 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44676 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44677 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44680 \begin_layout Subsection
44684 \begin_layout Standard
44685 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44686 \begin_inset space ~
44690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44692 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44699 \begin_layout Section
44703 \begin_layout Subsection
44707 \begin_layout Description
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44716 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44719 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44720 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44728 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44731 \begin_layout Description
44733 \begin_inset space ~
44737 \begin_inset Index idx
44740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44747 \begin_inset Index idx
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44751 Settings ! Date format
44756 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44757 \begin_inset Newline newline
44761 \begin_inset Flex URL
44764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44766 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44772 \begin_inset Newline newline
44775 For example the format
44776 \begin_inset Newline newline
44780 \begin_inset Newline newline
44783 prints the date as day/month/year.
44786 \begin_layout Description
44788 \begin_inset space ~
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44795 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44798 \begin_layout Description
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44803 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44805 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44807 \begin_inset space ~
44813 For a detailed description see section
44815 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44820 \begin_inset space ~
44828 \begin_layout Subsection
44830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44837 \begin_inset Index idx
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44847 \begin_inset Index idx
44850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44859 \begin_layout Description
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44864 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44869 The name will be used when the
44874 \begin_inset Newline newline
44878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44886 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44894 \begin_layout Description
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44899 command is the command LyX
44900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44907 LaTeX uses for printing.
44915 \begin_layout Description
44917 \begin_inset space ~
44921 \begin_inset space ~
44924 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44925 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44926 of the program that provides the
44933 \begin_layout Description
44935 \begin_inset space ~
44939 \begin_inset space ~
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44946 printer This option works only for the
44951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44963 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44964 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44967 \begin_layout Subsection
44972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44982 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44987 \begin_inset Index idx
44990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44999 \begin_layout Description
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45020 \begin_inset space ~
45023 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45028 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45049 are used for Cyrillic.
45050 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45063 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45064 LyX sets up in the background.
45065 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45068 \begin_layout Description
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45074 \begin_inset space ~
45077 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45082 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
45085 \begin_layout Description
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45095 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45102 options They only have an effect when the program
45106 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45109 \begin_layout Standard
45110 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45111 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45112 manuals of the applications.
45115 \begin_layout Description
45117 \begin_inset space ~
45120 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45127 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
45134 \begin_layout Description
45136 \begin_inset space ~
45139 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45146 reference "sub:Index-Program"
45153 \begin_layout Description
45155 \begin_inset space ~
45158 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45165 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
45172 \begin_layout Description
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45188 command Command for the program
45192 that is described in the section
45198 Additional Features
45203 \begin_layout Standard
45204 There are additionally the following options:
45207 \begin_layout Description
45209 \begin_inset space ~
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45221 \begin_inset space ~
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45228 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45246 to separate folders.
45247 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
45248 \begin_inset Index idx
45251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 \begin_inset Index idx
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45270 \begin_layout Description
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45288 \begin_inset space ~
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45295 changes Removes all manually set
45301 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45302 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45309 dialog when changing the document class.
45312 \begin_layout Section
45314 \begin_inset space ~
45318 \begin_inset Index idx
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45330 \begin_layout Subsection
45332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45334 name "sub:Converters"
45339 \begin_inset Index idx
45342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45351 \begin_layout Standard
45352 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45353 from one format to another.
45354 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45355 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45367 field and press the
45372 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45376 \begin_inset space ~
45381 drop-down list, modify the
45385 field and press the
45392 \begin_layout Standard
45395 Converter File Cache
45401 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45403 Maximum Age (in days
45406 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45407 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45410 \begin_layout Standard
45411 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45412 definition, is described in the section
45423 \begin_layout Subsection
45425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45427 name "sec:File-Formats"
45432 \begin_inset Index idx
45435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45442 \begin_inset Index idx
45445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45454 \begin_layout Standard
45455 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45464 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45467 \begin_layout Standard
45468 You can also define the
45470 Default output format
45472 that is used when you use
45474 View, Update, View Master Document
45478 Update Master Document
45484 menu or the toolbar.
45487 \begin_layout Standard
45488 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45499 \begin_layout Standard
45500 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45501 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45502 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45503 This is done by specifying a
45508 More about this is described in the section
45519 \begin_layout Chapter
45520 Units available in LyX
45521 \begin_inset Index idx
45524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45533 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45540 \begin_layout Standard
45542 \begin_inset space ~
45546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45548 reference "tab:Units"
45552 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45555 \begin_layout Standard
45556 \begin_inset Float table
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45563 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45589 \begin_inset Tabular
45590 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45591 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45744 scaled point (65536
45745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45805 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45860 % of original image width
45867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46074 \begin_layout Chapter
46076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46078 name "chap:Credits"
46085 \begin_layout Standard
46086 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46087 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46090 \begin_layout Itemize
46093 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46096 \begin_layout Itemize
46102 \begin_layout Itemize
46108 \begin_layout Itemize
46114 \begin_layout Itemize
46120 \begin_layout Itemize
46126 \begin_layout Itemize
46132 \begin_layout Itemize
46138 \begin_layout Itemize
46141 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46144 \begin_layout Itemize
46150 \begin_layout Itemize
46156 \begin_layout Itemize
46162 \begin_layout Itemize
46168 \begin_layout Itemize
46174 \begin_layout Itemize
46180 \begin_layout Itemize
46186 \begin_layout Itemize
46192 \begin_layout Itemize
46194 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46203 \begin_layout Standard
46204 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46207 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46214 \begin_layout Bibliography
46215 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46216 LatexCommand bibitem
46223 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46226 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46231 \begin_inset Newline newline
46235 \begin_inset Flex URL
46238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46240 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46248 \begin_layout Bibliography
46249 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46250 LatexCommand bibitem
46251 key "latexcompanion"
46255 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46257 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46260 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46263 \begin_layout Bibliography
46264 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46265 LatexCommand bibitem
46270 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46273 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46276 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46279 \begin_layout Bibliography
46280 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46281 LatexCommand bibitem
46288 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46291 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46294 \begin_layout Bibliography
46295 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46296 LatexCommand bibitem
46308 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46311 \begin_layout Bibliography
46312 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46313 LatexCommand bibitem
46319 \begin_inset Newline newline
46323 \begin_inset Flex URL
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46328 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46336 \begin_layout Bibliography
46337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46338 LatexCommand bibitem
46344 \begin_inset Newline newline
46348 \begin_inset Flex URL
46351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46353 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46361 \begin_layout Bibliography
46362 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46363 LatexCommand bibitem
46369 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46371 name "Documentation"
46372 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46381 \begin_inset Newline newline
46385 \begin_inset Flex URL
46388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46390 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46398 \begin_layout Bibliography
46399 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46400 LatexCommand bibitem
46406 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46408 name "Documentation"
46409 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46413 how to use the program
46418 \begin_inset Newline newline
46422 \begin_inset Flex URL
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46427 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46435 \begin_layout Bibliography
46436 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46437 LatexCommand bibitem
46443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46445 name "Documentation"
46446 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46455 \begin_inset Newline newline
46459 \begin_inset Flex URL
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46464 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46472 \begin_layout Bibliography
46473 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46474 LatexCommand bibitem
46480 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46482 name "Documentation"
46483 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46492 \begin_inset Newline newline
46496 \begin_inset Flex URL
46499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46501 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46509 \begin_layout Bibliography
46510 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46511 LatexCommand bibitem
46517 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46519 name "Documentation"
46520 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46524 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46525 \begin_inset Newline newline
46529 \begin_inset Flex URL
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46534 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46542 \begin_layout Bibliography
46543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46544 LatexCommand bibitem
46550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46552 name "Documentation"
46553 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46557 of the LaTeX-package
46562 \begin_inset Index idx
46565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46566 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46572 \begin_inset Newline newline
46576 \begin_inset Flex URL
46579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46581 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46589 \begin_layout Bibliography
46590 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46591 LatexCommand bibitem
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46599 name "Documentation"
46600 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46604 of the LaTeX-package
46609 \begin_inset Index idx
46612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46613 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46619 \begin_inset Newline newline
46623 \begin_inset Flex URL
46626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46628 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46636 \begin_layout Bibliography
46637 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46638 LatexCommand bibitem
46644 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46646 name "Documentation"
46647 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46651 of the LaTeX-package
46656 \begin_inset Index idx
46659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46660 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46666 \begin_inset Newline newline
46670 \begin_inset Flex URL
46673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46675 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46683 \begin_layout Bibliography
46684 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46685 LatexCommand bibitem
46691 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46693 name "Documentation"
46694 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46698 of the LaTeX-package
46703 \begin_inset Index idx
46706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46707 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46713 \begin_inset Newline newline
46717 \begin_inset Flex URL
46720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46722 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46730 \begin_layout Bibliography
46731 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46732 LatexCommand bibitem
46738 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46740 name "Documentation"
46741 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46745 of the LaTeX-package
46750 \begin_inset Index idx
46753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46754 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46760 \begin_inset Newline newline
46764 \begin_inset Flex URL
46767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46777 \begin_layout Bibliography
46778 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46779 LatexCommand bibitem
46785 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46787 name "Documentation"
46788 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46792 of the LaTeX-package
46797 \begin_inset Index idx
46800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46801 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46807 \begin_inset Newline newline
46811 \begin_inset Flex URL
46814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46816 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46824 \begin_layout Bibliography
46825 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46826 LatexCommand bibitem
46832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46834 name "Documentation"
46835 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46839 of the LaTeX-package
46844 \begin_inset Index idx
46847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46854 \begin_inset Newline newline
46858 \begin_inset Flex URL
46861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46863 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46871 \begin_layout Bibliography
46872 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46873 LatexCommand bibitem
46879 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46882 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46886 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46887 \begin_inset Newline newline
46891 \begin_inset Flex URL
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46896 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46904 \begin_layout Bibliography
46905 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46906 LatexCommand bibitem
46912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46915 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46919 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46920 \begin_inset Newline newline
46924 \begin_inset Flex URL
46927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46929 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46937 \begin_layout Bibliography
46938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46939 LatexCommand bibitem
46945 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46948 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46952 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46953 \begin_inset Newline newline
46957 \begin_inset Flex URL
46960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46962 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46970 \begin_layout Bibliography
46971 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46972 LatexCommand bibitem
46978 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46981 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46985 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46986 \begin_inset Newline newline
46990 \begin_inset Flex URL
46993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46995 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47003 \begin_layout Bibliography
47004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47005 LatexCommand bibitem
47011 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47014 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47018 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
47019 \begin_inset Newline newline
47023 \begin_inset Flex URL
47026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47028 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47036 \begin_layout Bibliography
47037 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47038 LatexCommand bibitem
47044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47047 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47051 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
47052 \begin_inset Newline newline
47056 \begin_inset Flex URL
47059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47061 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47069 \begin_layout Bibliography
47070 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47071 LatexCommand bibitem
47077 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47080 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47084 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
47085 \begin_inset Newline newline
47089 \begin_inset Flex URL
47092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47094 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47102 \begin_layout Bibliography
47103 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47104 LatexCommand bibitem
47110 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47113 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47117 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
47118 \begin_inset Newline newline
47122 \begin_inset Flex URL
47125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47127 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47135 \begin_layout Bibliography
47136 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47137 LatexCommand bibitem
47143 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47146 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47150 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
47151 \begin_inset Newline newline
47155 \begin_inset Flex URL
47158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47160 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47168 \begin_layout Bibliography
47169 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47170 LatexCommand bibitem
47176 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47179 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47183 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
47184 \begin_inset Newline newline
47188 \begin_inset Flex URL
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47193 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47201 \begin_layout Bibliography
47202 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47203 LatexCommand bibitem
47209 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47212 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47216 about new features in
47221 \begin_inset Newline newline
47225 \begin_inset Flex URL
47228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47230 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47238 \begin_layout Standard
47239 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47273 \begin_inset Note Note
47276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47283 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47284 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47285 bibliography is the second one:
47293 \begin_layout Standard
47294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47295 LatexCommand bibtex
47296 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47297 options "biblio/alphadin"
47304 \begin_layout Standard
47305 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47308 \begin_layout Standard
47309 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47310 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47316 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47317 LatexCommand printindex